THE INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL FOR RECREATIONAL ELECTRONICS

January 1991 $3.00 us

CANADA 84 00

Elegant L-C-R Bridge

The Complete Preamplifier

8031 Single Board Computer

A PC Multi-measurement Card

1.5-70MHz SWR Meter

A Logic Analyzer

G:u...1E IN;
—•Lk;
CD

r.qa E r-
fr
3 —

(D

3. L
,
•
ÇDW
-7

Cot.;
CPC.

WorldRadioHistory
 fl
SESCOM IN C. THE "FIR ST CHO I
CE"FO R
PARTS DIVISION
2100 WARD DR.
HENDERSON, NV 89015 -9998
CON STRUCTO RS HARDWARE

RACk ClIASSiS Rub-ON LETTERS COM pONENT PARTS

MODEL #. DESCRIPTION PRICE
TRANSISTORS:
LT-1 CAPITAL LETTERS HELVETICA 14 pt. 3.95 PART NO. DESCRIPTION 1-9 10-99 100 +
LT-2 LOWER CASE LETTERS HELVETICA 14 pt. 3.95 2N3904 NPN TO92 .12 .10 .08
LT-3 NUMBERS HELVETICA 14 pt. 3.95 2N3906 PNP 7092 .12 .10 .08
LT-4 CAPITAL LETTERS HELVETICA 10 pt. 3.95 2N2102 PNP 7039 .80 .67 .54
LT-5 LOWER CASE LETTERS HELVETICA 10 pt. 3.95 2N4037 PNP 1039 .90 .75 .60
PRICE $ LT-6 NUMBERS HELVETICA 10 pt. 3.95 PN2219A NPN TO237 .40 .34 .28
MODEL O. DESCRIPTION (Width xDepth xHeight)
28.00 LT-7 CAPITAL LETTERS HELVETICA 6pt. 3.95 PN2905A PNP TO237 .40 .34 .28
1RU5 19 x5x1.75 in. (482.6 x127 x44.45mm)
(482.6 x177 x44.45mm) 30.00 LT-8 LOWER CASE LETTERS HELVETICA 6pt. 3.95
1RU7 19 x7 x1.75 in
32.00 LT-9 NUMBERS HELVETICA 6pt. 4.95
1RU10 19x 10 x1.75 in. (482.6 x254 x44.45mm)
30.00 LT-10 DIAL MARKING (DOTS) 4.95 DIODES:
2RU5 19 x5x3.50 in. (482.6 x127 x88.9mm)
LT-11 DIAL MARKING (LINES) 3.95 PART NO. DESCRIPTION 1-9 10-99 100 +
2RU7 19 x7x3.50 in. (482.6 x177.8 x88.9mm) 32.00
LT-12 WORDS (AUDIO) HELVETICA 10 pt. 3.95 1N34A GE DIODE .17 .15 .13
2RU10 19 x10 x3.50 in. (482.6 x254 x88.9mm) 34.00
38.00 LT-12 WORDS (AUDIO) HELVETICA CAPS 6pt 3.95 1N4001 SI DIODE .13 .11 .10
3RU5 19 x5x5.25 in. (482.6 x127 x133.35mm)
3RU7 19 x7x5.25 in. (482.6 x177 8x133.35mm) 40.00 LT-12 WORDS (AUDIO) HELVETICA UPPER 1N4148 SI DIODE .09 .07 .06
AND LOWER CASE 6pt. 3.95
3RU10 19 x10 x5.25 in. (482.6 x254 x133.35mm) 42.00

The above rack chassis are made of .063 aluminum. LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS:
The front and rear panels are clear brushed anodized. TERMS AND CONDITIONS PART NO. DESCRIPTION 1-9 10-99 100 +
All hardware is included. Assembly Required. MINIMUM ORDER: The minimum order is $10.00. LF351N SINGLE OP-AMP .60 .54 .48
TERMS: Terms of payment on open accounts are NET 30 days LF353N DUAL OP-AMP 1.05 .95 .84
from date of invoice. NE5534N SINGLE OP-AMP 1.28 1.15 1.02
METAL CAbiNETS C.O.D. ORDERS: Payment must be made in cash, money order NE5534AN LOW NOISE 1.80 1.62 1.44
or certified check. Acompany check will be accepted only if previ- SINGLE OP-AMP
ously approved by the factory. NE5532N DUAL OP-AMP 1.85 1.67 1.48
OPEN ACCOUNTS: SESCOM, INC. extends credit to government
agencies and industrial accounts with agood published rating. Firms
may apply foras open account by requesting acredit application from
ICSOCKETS:
the Accounts Receivable department. All orders are shipped C.0.0.
PART NO. DESCRIPTION 1-9 10-99 100 +
until credit is approved. (Please allow 4to 6weeks to open anew
SOC -8 8PIN TIN .11 .10 .09
account.) We accept Mastercard and Visa.
PRICES: Catalog prices are NET, FOB destination shipped UPS SOC -14 14 PIN TIN .12 .11 .10
ground. UPS BLUE and RED LABEL service available at an additional SOC -16 16 PIN TIN .13 .12 .11
MODEL #. DESCRIPTION (Width xDepth xHeight) PRICE charge: UPS BLUE is $10.00 and UPS RED is $20.00. PRICES ARE SOC -18 18 PIN TIN .15 .14 .13
MC-1A 4x3x2in. (101.6 x76.2 x50.8mm) 15.00 SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. Orders are invoiced at SOC -20 20 PIN TIN .19 .16 .15
MC-2A 6x3x2in. (152.4 x76.2 x50.8mm) 17.00 prices in effect at the time of shipment unless specifically quoted oth-
MC-3A 8x3x2in. (203.2 x76.2 x50.8mm) 19.00 erwise. SESCOM, INC. shall add any existing or future Federal, State,
MC-4A 4x5 x3in. (101.6 x127 x76.2mm) 17.00 or Local taxes that may apply. We reserve the right to apply the above CARBON FILM RESISTORS:
6x5x3in. (152.4 x127 x76.2mm) 19.00 if your Tax Exemption Certificate is not on file with our office. PART NO. DESCRIPTION 1-9 10-99 100 +
MC-5A
21.00 SHORTAGE OR DAMAGE: All claims for shortage or shipment CF +VALUE 5% 1/4W .05 .02 .01
MC-6A 8x5x3in. (203.2 x127 x76.2mm)
error must be made within 10 days after receipt of the shipment. Our
MC-7A 4x7x4in. (101.6 x177.8 x101.6mm) 19.00 ALL STANDARD VALUES 1.0 OHM THRU 1.0M OHM
liability is limited to the material value on the invoice.
MC-8A 6x7x4in. (152.4 x177.8 x101.6mm) 21.00
MERCHANDISE RETURN: Aprior written authorization from
MC-9A 8x7x4in. (203.2 x177.8 x101.6mm) 23.00
SESCOM, INC. must be issued before return of any material. Instruc-
POTENTIOMETERS:
The above cabinets are made of .063 aluminum. tions for returning the material will accompany the authorization.
Material that is returned without authorization or is over 90 days will PART NO. DESCRIPTION 1-9 10-99 100 +
The front and rear panels are clear brushed anodized. me 10K AUDIO TAPER 2.00 1.80 1.60
carry arestocking fee of aminimum of 25% to amaximum 100%.
All hardware and rubber feet are included. Assembly Required.
Special order items will not be accepted for return.
SUBSTITUTIONS: We reserve the right to substitute higher
quality (but identical part) at our option, unless you specify no sub- CONNECTORS:
PUNCII KiTS ANd PUNCIES stitution at the time of the order. PART NO. DESCRIPTION 1-9 10-99 100 +
XLR FCA 3PIN CABLE FEMALE 3.20 2.88 2.56
Model d. Description Price $
HP-2 XX TOOL KIT 129.75 XLR M CA 3PIN CABLE MALE 2.75 2.48 2.20
HP-4 BENCH MOUNT 15.00 SkEET METAL PUNCIIES XLR FCH 3PIN CHASSIS FEMALE 3.60 3.24 2.88
PD-30 ROUND 1/16" 9.50 XLR M CH 3PIN CHASSIS MALE 2.60 2.40 2.08
PD-31 ROUND 5/64" 9.50 1/4 ST 1/4' STERIO JACK .97 .87 .78
PD-32 ROUND 3/32" 9.50 MODEL #. HOLE SIZE PILOT HOLE PRICE $ 3.5 ST 3.5mm STERIO JACK .97 .87 .78
PD-33 ROUND 7/64' 9.50 PUNCH 1 3/8" ROUND 3/16" 8.95 RCA RCA PHONO JACK CHASSIS .65 .59 .52
PD-34 ROUND 1/8" 9.50 PUNCH 2 7/16" ROUND 7/16' 8.95
PD-35 ROUND 9/64" 9.50 PUNCH 3 1/2' ROUND 7/32' 8.95
PD-36 ROUND 5/32" 9.50 PUNCH 4 9/16' ROUND 7/32" 11.95 CAPACITORS: Axial Lead Electrolytic
PD-37 ROUND 11/64" 9.50 PUNCH 5 5/8" ROUND 7/32' 11.95 PART NO. DESCRIPTION 1-9 10-99 100 +
PD-38 ROUND 3/16' 9.50 11.95 AC 1/50 luf -50V .38 .35 .30
Model d. Description Price S PD-39 PUNCH 6 11/16" ROUND 7/32"
ROUND 13/64' 9.50
PUNCH 7 3/4" ROUND 7/32' 11.95 AC 4.7/25 4.7uf -25V .39 .35 .30
HP-1 5JR TOOL KIT 49.00 PD-40 ROUND 7/32' 9.50
PUNCH 8 13/16" ROUND 7/32" 11.95 AC 10/25 10uf -25V .39 .35 .30
HP-3 BENCH MOUNT 15.00 PD-41 ROUND 15/64" 9.50
PUNCH 9 7/8" ROUND 7/32' 11.95 AC 47/25 47u1- 25V .46 .42 .37
PD-42 ROUND 1/4' 9.50
PD-1 ROUND 1/16" 6.00 PUNCH 10 1" ROUND 5/16' 12.95 AC 100/25 100uf -25V .69 .62 .55
PD-43 RONND 17/64" 9.50
PD-2 ROUND 5/64" 6.00 PD-44 ROUND 9/32 9.50 PUNCH 11 1-1/16" ROUND 5/16" 12.95 AC 220/35 220uf -35V .97 .87 .78
PD-3 ROUND 3/32" 6.00 PD-45 ROUND 19/64" 9.50 PUNCH 12 1-1/8' ROUND 5/16" 12.95 AC 470/35 470uf -35V 1.34 1.21 1.07
PD-46 ROUND 5/16" 9.50 PUNCH 13 1-3/16" ROUND 5/16" 12.95 AC 1000/35 1000uf -35V 2.22 2.00 1.78
PD-4 ROUND 7/64" 6.00
PD-47 ROUND 21/64' 9.50 PUNCH 14 1-1/4' ROUND 5/16' 13.95
PD-5 ROUND 1/8' 6.00 PD-48 ROUND 11/32' 9.50 13.95
PUNCH 15 1-3/8" ROUND 5/16"
PD-6 ROUND 9/6e 6.00 PD-49 ROUND 23/64" 9.50 PUNCH 16 1-1/2' ROUND 5/16" 15.95 CAPACITORS: Radial Lead Electrolytic
PD-7 ROUND 5/32" 6.00 PD-50 ROUND 3/8" 9.50 PUNCH 17 1-5/8" ROUND 5/16" 20.95 PART NO. DESCRIPTION 1-9 10-99 100 +
PD-51 ROUND 25/64" 9.50 PUNCH 18 1-3/4' ROUND 5/16" 23.95 RC 1/50 1uf -50V .26 .24 .21
PD-8 ROUND 11/64" 6.00
PD-52 ROUND 13/32" 9.50 PUNCH 19 2-5/8' ROUND 1/2' 59.95 RC 4.7/25 4.7uf -25V .28 .26 .23
PD-9 ROUND 3/16' 6.00 PD-53 ROUND 27/64" 9.50
PUNCH 20 11/16" SQUARE 1/2' 31.95 RC 10/25 10u1- 25V .31 .28 .25
PD-10 ROUND 13/64' 6.00 PD-54 ROUND 7/16' 9.50
PUNCH 21 3/4" SQUARE 1/2" 35.95 RC 47/25 47uf -25V .39 .35 .28
PD-11 ROUND 7/32" 6.00 PD-55 ROUND 29/64" 9.50
PUNCH 22 1" SQUARE 1/2" 45.95 RC 100/25 100u1- 25V .41 .36 .33
PD-56 ROUND 15/32" 9.50
PD-12 ROUND 15/64" 6.00 PUNCH 23 21/32 x5/16 REC. 1/2" 45.95 RC 220/35 220uf -35V .61 .55 .49
PD-57 ROUND 31/64" 9.50
PD-13 ROUND 1/4' 6.00 PD-58 6.00 "PUNCH 24 "THURST RACES FOR PUNCHES RC 470/35 470uf -35V .99 .90 .80
ROUND 1/2'
PD-59 ROUND 33/64' 6.00 (FOR EASIER PUNCHING) 1" thru 1-3/4" 9.95 RC 1000/35 1000uf -35V 1.27 1.15 1.02
PD-14 ROUND 17/64' 6.00
PD-15 ROUND 9/32 6.00
PD-60
PD-61
ROUND 17/32'
SQUARE 1/8'
6.00
66.90 •
UPS GROUND SHIPPING IS FREE WITHIN THE CONTINENTAL LIMITS OF THE USA •
PD-16
PD-17
SQUARE 1/8'
SQUARE 5/32'
66.90
66.90
PD-62
PD-63
SQUARE 5/32"
SQUARE 3/16'
66.90
66.90
M;tsterCitrd TOLL FREE ORDERING IN ALL 50 STATES AND CANADA
PD-18 SQUARE 3/16" 66.90 PD-64 REC. 1/8 x3/16' 83.10 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION CONTACT:
PD-19 REC. 1/8 x3/16' 66.90
PD-65
PD-66
REC. 1/8 x1/4"
REC. 1/8 x5/16'
83.10
83.10 SESCOM INC.- PARTS DIVISION, 2100 WARD DR., HENDERSON, NV 89015-9998
PD-20 REC. 1/8 x7/32" 66.90
PD-21 REC. 1/8 x15/64" 66.90
PD-67
PD-68
REC. 1/8 x3/8' 83.10
REC. 1/8 x11/32 75.10
=A FOR ORDERS: 1-800-634-3457 •FAX: 1-702-565-4828 •REGULAR BUSINESS: 1-702-565-3400
BUSINESS HOURS: 8:00 A.M. TO 4:00 P.M. PACIFIC TIME, MONDAY THRU FRIDAY

WorldRadioHistory
 January 1991

CONTENTS Volume 1
Number 4

In our next issue:

• MIDI-to-CV interface
• Central heating controller (1)
EDITORIAL
• 6.0 MHz TV sound
demodulator 11 Forging Fiber Links
• PC transistor tester
• Phones in the air
AUDIO & HI-FI
• Decadic voltage dividers
• Simple function generator 44 PROJECT: The Complete Preamplifier Pt. 1
• Serial video card by T. Giffard

Front cover COMPUTERS e'"

A consortium of British
14 PROJECT: Multifunction Measurement Card for Logic analyser -p. 38
scientists led by ateam
from University College PCs Pt. 1
London (UCL) has devel- by J. Ruffell
oped afully automated 54 PROJECT: 8031 Single Board Computer
technique for producing by R. Grodzik
three-dimensional images
by computer. The picture
shows the consortium DESIGN IDEAS
leader, Dr Jan-Peter
Muller of UCL working 52 Advanced Input Stage for aLeft/Right Revolution
on an image of the Big Counter
Horn mountain range in by H. Matjaz
central Wyoming, USA.
The information origi-
nates from apair of satel- GENERAL INTEREST
lite photographs of the
49 In Quest of Pangram Pt. 4
area taken from different
angles—in this instance by Lee C.F. Sallows
SWR meter for 1.5-70 MHz -p.58
by the French satellite
"Système pour l'observa- RADIO, TELEVISION & COMMUNICATIONS
tion de la terre" (SPOT).
The new system automati- 28 PROJECT: PC-Controlled Videotext Decoder
cally "matches" easily PC-VT7000 Pt. 2
identifiable features
an ELV design
within the picture and, by
34 Error Detection and Correction
use of geometry, the
heights of these features by Brian Patrick McArdle
can be determined. This 42 23/24-cm FM ATV Receiver
data can then be used to a review by Mike Wooding, G6IQM
create acolour image of 57 Slide Potentiometers in the Video Mixer—
terrain height (left screen). An Update
The system relates pat- 64 Interval Control for Camcorders—An Update
terns of images to produce
athree-dimensional repre-
TEST & MEASUREMENT Videotext decoder -p. 28
sentation of the object in
question.
Dept. of Photogram- 20 Measurement Techniques Pt. 3
metry and Surveying by F.P. Zantis
UCL 23 PROJECT: A Simply Elegant L-C-R Bridge
Gower Street by E. Chicken, G3BIK
LONDON WC1E 6BT 38 PROJECT: Logic Analyser Pt. 1
by K. Nischalke and H.J. Schulz
58 PROJECT: SWR Meter for 1.5-70MHz
by J. Bareford

MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
Copyright © 1991 Elektuur BV

ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA is publish

Electronics Scene 12 & 60; New Books 61; Corrections 62
cd II times ayear at 128 per year 150 for tono years
by Audio Amateur Publications Inc 305 Union St & 63; Readers Services 65; Terms of Business 66; Adver-
Peterborough NH 03458 USA Application to mad at
second class rates pending at Peterborough NH and tisers' Index 72.
an additional mailing office
POSTMASTER: Send address changes to
Udine Electronics USA Caller Poe 876 Peter
8031 single-board computer -p. 54
borough NH 03458-0876 Return Postage Guaranteed

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 4

DEALER INQUIRIES INVITED

Now Available by Popular Demand!

BULLOCK ON BOXES
BY ROBERT W. BULLOCK III
with Robert White

Since 1980, readers of Speaker Builder magazine have

delighted in the scope and clarity of Bob Bullock's explana-
tions of vented-box loudspeaker systems. Now, for the first
time, these articles have been collected into a single in-
valuable volume: BULLOCK ON BOXES.
This book is an easy-to-read guide to designing and build-
ing vented-box systems based on Thiele/Small models.
And in addition to the background theory and descrip-
tions of the models, BULLOCK ON BOXES carefully
covers a host of related information drawn from nu-
merous resources. Computer modeling, as demon-
strated by the authors' BOXRESPONSE and BOX-
MODEL programs, is also explained in clear detail.
A professor of applied mathematics at Miami Univer-
sity (Ohio) since 1966 and long-time hands-on speaker BKAA8 1990, 81
2 "x 11"
/ $10.95
buff, Dr. Bullock brings an unparalleled range of ex-
perience to the pages of BULLOCK ON BOXES. Fully
indexed and referenced, with glossary, bibliography, and SPECIAL OFFER: For a limited time only, purchase
BULLOCK ON BOXES and receive your choice of software
more than 100 illustrations, BULLOCK ON BOXES is
package below at $5 off the regular retail price. Order
apractical handbook and lasting reference indispensable
BKAA8/S.*
to every serious speaker builder. Order yours today! 'Because of taxation requirements, software not available to residents of CT.

CHAPTERS: •T/S Calculator Programs SOFTWARE PACKAGES AVAILABLE (Sale Prices Shown):
•Thiele, Small, and Vented (TI-58/59, HP-67/97) BOXRESPONSE $20
Loudspeaker Design • BOXRESPONSE: An Apple Apple (not Mac) #BOX1A5 Commodore #BOX1C5
• Determining Design Program for the Thiele/ IBM #BOX 1B5 Comm. Cassette #BOX3CC
Parameters for Your Small Models BOXRESPONSE WITH GRAPHICS $45
Loudspeaker • Realizing BOXRESPONSE's IBM only #BOX2B5G
• Fine Points of Vented Potential BOXMODEL WITH GRAPHICS $45
Speaker Design • BOXMODEL: An Aid to IBM only #MOD3B5G
• Alternative Alignments Woofer System Design
[NOTE: In general, BOXRESPONSE automatically generates alignments for agiven driver.
(incl. Fourth Order) •Correspondence & Updates BOXMODEL does not do this, but instead compares up to four given alignments
simultaneously. Both programs display various performance aspects of passive-radiator or
vented-box systems.]

El CK E MO E MCNISA

E YES! Please send me BULLOCK ON

BOXES at $10.95 each! BKAA8 $

NAME E SOFTWARE, TOO! Please send me

one BULLOCK ON BOXES at $10.95 BKAA8/S

STREET & NO. PLUS my choice of software package

at only $ BKAA8/S
CITY STATE ZIP

POSTAGE AND HANDLING (see below)

MC OR VISA NUMBER EXPIRE

TOTAL ORDER $

OLD COLONY SOUND LAB

PO Box 243, Dept. E91 POSTAGE AND HANDLING:
Peterborough, NH 03458-0243
U.S. — Book only: $1.75 first book, 50c each additional.
(603) 924-6371 /924-6526 Book plus software: $2.25.
FAX: (603) 924-9467
Canada—Book only: $4.50 first book, 50c each additional.
Answering machine for credit card orders only:
before 9:00 a.m., after 4:00 p.m. and weekends.
Book plus software: $5.00.
Have all information plus MCNISA available. Other—Add 20% to order.

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 Discover Your Career Potential In The
Fast Growing Field Of High-Tech Electronics!
CIE Gives You The Training You Need to Succeed...
At Your Own Pace...& In Your Own Home!

I fyou're anxious to get ahead ...and

build areal career.. you owe it to
yourself to find out about the Cleveland
Practical Training...
At Your Own Pace.
Through CIE, you can train for your
Institute of Electronics! new career while you keep your pres-
CIE can help you discover your ent job. Each course allows agener-
career potential in the fast growing ous completion time, and there are
field of high-tech electronics. Acareer no limitations on how fast you can
that will challenge and excite you study. Should you already have some
every day.. reward you with apowerful electronics experience, CIE offers
feeling of personal accomplishment... several courses which start at the
and deliver alevel of financial security intemiediate level.
you may have only dreamed of before!
As the leading school in home-study
"State-Of-The-Art"
electronics, CIE has helped over Facilities & Equipment.
150,000 students in the U.S.A. and In 1969, CIE pioneered the first elec-
over 70 foreign countries get started in tronics laboratory course, and in 1984,
this exciting field. To find out how CIE the first Microprocessor Laboratory.
could be helping you.. read on.. then Today, no other home study school can
send for aCIE catalog TODAY! match CIE's state-of-the-art equipment.
And all your laboratory equipment is
A Growing Need For
included in your tuition cost. There is
Trained Professionals! no extra charge—it's yours to use while
The career opportunities shown here you study at home and on the job after
are only afew of the challenging, high- you complete your course!
paying careers you could enjoy as an
electronics technician.
Earn Your Degree To
You could be the "brains" behind the Become A Professional
scenes of an exciting TV broadcast... In Electronics!
trouble-shoot life-saving medical equip- Every CIE course you take earns you
ment...design exotic new aeronautics credit towards the completion of your
systems. CIEs job-oriented programs Associate in Applied Science Degree, so
offer you the quickest possible path to you can work towards your degree in
the career of your dreams! And CIE also features Personal Training From A stages. And CIE is the only school that awards you
military and union re-training, to build on what for fast study, which can save you thousands of
you already know.
Renowned Faculty. dollars in obtaining the same electronics education
Unlike the impersonal approach of large class- found in four-year Bachelors Degree programs!
Dozens Of Fascinating room study, CIE offers you one-on-one instructional
Careers To Choose From! help 6days aweek, toll-free. Each CIE lesson is
Even if you aren't sure which career is best for authored by an independent specialist, backed by
you, CIE can get you started with core lessons CIE instructors who work directly with you to Send For Your
applicable to all areas of electronics. As you answer your questions and provide technical assis-
advance, CIE makes job opportunities available tance when you need it. Catalog Today!
to you through the bimonthly school paper,
0
The Electron. .¢"
0

NHSC
CIE World Headquarters
.o I Cleveland Institute of Electronics, Inc.
1776 East 17th St., Cleveland, Ohio 44114
YES! Please send me your independent study catalog (For your convenience,
CIE wit have arepresentative contact you—there is no obligation.)
4---
Pnnt Name

__ ,,,, be? Address Apt tI

e ,S.,„?-r Pee
:
-., ...,5.
-t4e,4. .. ake .
(...`.ie
City/State/Zip

.
T
4°.
. e ......:.e e
_ee-o'
- el -
e
e .." 7 2
,--

c .
Age Area Cade/Phone No

, . e. Check box tor G.I. Bill bulletin on educational benefits: oVeteran ci Active Duty
..p.- e --,..e This Coupon Today! AEL02

s,
o

,Z0
*S.

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 6

OLD COLONY'S
USER-FRIENDLY SOFTWARE
Speaker Designer TM
Release 1.2 by Stuart E. Bonney
Aloudspeaker system design aid and modeling tool for use with
BULLOCK & WHITE
both closed and vented systems over the frequency range from
10 to 300Hz. Computes and displays system frequency response,
BOXRESPONSE L-Pad Program by Glenn Phillips: Appeared in Speaker
Model-based performance data for either closed-box or Builder (2183, pp. 20-22). It is useful for padding down a
power handling capabilities, and relative sound pressure level
vented-box loudspeakers with or without afirst- or sec- tweeter or midrange while still retaining the same load as
(SPL) outputs for each of 26 discrete frequencies over this range.
ond-order electrical high pass filter as an active equalizer the driver itself.
Includes one year support by the author when the user registers
this Shareware product. Each $19.50 [SB 1/84]. The program disk also contains seven additional Vent Computation by Glenn Phillips: Calculates the
IBM 51
4 " 360K DSIDD
/ SPD-1135 programs as follows: needed vent length for 1, 2or 4ports of the same diameter.
Air Core: This program was written as aquick way of eval- Input box volume in cubic feet and required tuning fre-
Loudspeaker Modeling Program quency (f0), output is vent length and vent area for each
by Ralph Gonzalez (SB 1, 2, 3/87) uating the resistance effects of different gauge wire on agiven
value inductor. The basis for the program is an article in case.
LMP produces afull-range frequency response prediction for
multi-way loudspeakers, including the effect of the crossover, Speaker Builder (1/83, pp. 13-14) by Max Knittel. The pro- Medium: 5% "SS/DD Disk. Price, $25.
driver rolloffs, interdriver time delay, "diffraction loss," etc. (In- gram asks for the inductor value in millihenries (mH) and
Specify:
cludes author support.) Each $17.50 the gauge wire to be used. (NOTE: only gauges 16-38.)
Specify:
BOXRESPONSE
Apple II 51
4 " SSIDD
/ LMP-1A5
Series Notch: Developed to study the effects of notch filters Apple BOX-1A5
Apple Macintosh 312 " SS/DD
/ LMP-2M3G in the schematics of some manufacturers. Enter the com- Commodore 64 [Disk) BOX-105
IBM PC/XT/AT 514 " DS/DD
/ LMP-2850 ponents of the network in whole numbers (i.e., 10 for 10/OF Commodore 64 (Cassette) BOX-3CC
Commodore 64 51 / " DS/DD
4 LMP-1C5 and 1.5 for 1.5mH) and indicate whether you want one or IBM BOX-1B5
"Souped-Up" LMP provides professional-quality graphics and two octaves on either side of resonance. Output is frequency,
afast, friendly, user interface. Remains compatible with LMP data phase angle and dB loss. IBM Plus Graphics
files and is available for IBM PC (CGA, EGA, VGA, or Hercules BOXRESPONSE BOX-2B5G $50
graphics) and Macintosh computers. The Macintosh version also pro- Stabilizer 1: Calculates the resistor-capacitor values needed
vides square wave analysis with audible output. to compensate for aknown voice coil inductance and driver
Each $49.50 (upgrade price: $39.50') DC resistance.
Specify:
IBM PC/XT/AT 51
4 "DS/DD
/ LMP-3B5G Optimum Box: Aquick program based on Thiele/Small to PASSIVE CROSSOVER
Apple Macintosh 31 2 "SS/DD
/ LMP-3M3G predict the proper vented box size, tuning and —3dB down
This disk is aresult of Mr. Bullock's extensive research
'Orlgonal LMP disk or sales recelpt must be included wr order point. It is based only on small signal parameters, therefore,
concerning first-, second-, third-, and fourth-order passive
it is only an estimate of the response at low power (i.e., limited
crossovers in Speaker Builder 1, 2& 3/85; $25
Driver Evaluation excursion),
and Crossover Design Specify:
Response Function: Calculates the small signal response
by G. R. Koonce (SB 5188) PASSIVE CROSSOVER CAD
curve of agiven box/driver combination after inputting the
Disk 1evaluates the suitability of drivers for closed, vented and Apple PAS-1A5
free-air resonance of the driver (fs ), the overall "Q" of the
passive radiator enclosures, and allows detailed designs of vented
driver (Q 75 ), the equivalent volume of air equal to the Commodore 64 (Disk) PAS-105
boxes. IBM PAS-1B5
suspension (VAs ), the box tuning frequency (fB ), and the
Disk 2, in addition to driver evaluations, allows the design of
first-, second-, and third-order crossovers. SVIBM: 360K, DS/DD. box volume (VB ). Output is the frequency and relative out- IBM Plus Graphics
Each $12.50 put at that frequency. CROSSOVER CAD PAS-2B5G $50
Specify:
Driver Evaluations DR1-1 B5
Crossover Design CRS-1B5
pects to mount adriver combination on aflat baffle,
Active Filter Design the summed response can be optimized to compen-
by Fernando Garcia Vlesca (SB 4/88) sate for rearward displacement of awoofer's acoustic
Calculates component values for Butterworth filters in four con- center with respect to atweeter. CALSOD can model
figurations: High- and low-pass in second- and third-order. (In-
cludes author support.) Each $17.50
Computer-Aided Loudspeaker up to seven drivers at atime in afour-way system giv-
IBM 51
4 " 380K DS/DD
/ ACT-1B5 System Optimization and Design ing the summed response and acoustic phase response
of the entire system.
by Witold Waldman
Two-Way Active Crossover Design The CALSOD program comes on asingle 360K
by Gary Galo (SB 5188) floppy, and requires one directory and two subdirec-
Performs the calculations for the eight two-way active crossover CALSOD is anew entry into the field of crossover net-
tories in installation, plus access to the DOS GRAF-
designs described by Bob Bullock using formulas exactly as given work optimizing software available for the IBM PC
in the articles; plus aprogram to calculate Vni .(Includes one TABL file, which it uses for acouple of special sym-
desktop computer. It combines the transfer function
year user support.) Each $20 bols. The 133-page User Manual, provided on asec-
Specify: of an LC network with the acoustic transfer function
ond disk, is well written, adequately describes the
IBM 51
4 " 360K DS/DD
/ TWO-1B5 of the loudspeaker, by using some form of iterative
IBM 31
2 " 720K DS/DD
/ TWU-1B3 various program functions, and contains an excellent
analysis. CALSOD creates, through the process of
tutorial example, which demonstrates the use of the
Stepped Volume Controls trial-and-error curve fitting, asuitable transfer func-
program.
by Joseph O'Connell (TAA 4/88) tion model which it can then optimize. The program
These ready-to-run Mac programs come on a31 2 -inch SS/DD disk
/ is the subject of CALSOD author Witold Waldman's Specify:
initialized as a400K disk for compatibility with all machines. research paper "Simulation and Optimization of
Also included are the Pascal source codes, should you wish to IBM 51/a 360K DEMO . CAL-286D $ 5.00*
customize them for your own use. Program A. Precisely matches Multiway Loudspeaker Systems Using aPersonal
IBM 2x51/
4 360K DS/DD CAL-2B6 $65.00
the resistor values to the measured or estimated source and load Computer" which appeared in the Audio Engineer-
IBM 31/
2 720K DS/DD CAL-284 $67.50
impedances, yielding great accuracy. Your volume control can ing Society Journal for September 1988, pp. 651-663.
have 3to 99 positions. The program will ask you how many dB •Usable as credit toward later purchase °null CALSOD.
CALSOD differs considerably from other software
each step should be attenuated and has provisions for astandard
audio taper or any other taper you devise. Program B. Calculates since it models the entire loudspeaker output of a
the taper that will result with your actual resistor values, because multiway system, including the low-end response, NOTE: OLD COLONY SOFTWARE SHOWN ON
you are limited to standard values or with series and parallel com- and the summed responses of each system driver. THIS PAGE IS NOT RETURNABLE FOR REFUND
binations. It can also show the effects of different source and load OR CREDIT. ALSO, BECAUSE OF UNREASON-
impedances on the taper. Both programs (contained on the some The program performs alot of tricks. One of the
ABLE TAXATION REQUIREMENTS BY THEIR
disk) allow you to save their output to atext file and include more spectacular of these allows the designer to spec- STATE, WE REGRETFULLY ARE UNABLE TO
author support via mail. Each $25 ify the location of the driver acoustic centers using SELL SOFTWARE TO RESIDENTS OF CONNEC-
Apple Macintosh 31
4 " SS/DD
/ SVC-1M3 TICUT.
an XYZ coordinate system. Thus, if the designer ex-

POSTAGE & HANDLING: in US, please add 51.75 for first disk and 50e
each additional disk. In Canada, please add $4.50. Osrerseas, please include OLD COLONY SOUND LAB
20% of total order for shipping. PO Box 243, Dept. E91, Peterborough, New Hampshire 03458 USA
(603) 924-6371 /FAX: (603) 924-9467
Answering machine for credit card orders only: (603) 924-6371
DEALER INQUIRIES INVITED before 9:00 a.m., after 4:00 p.m. and weekends.
Have information plus MC/VISA available.

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 Now! Experience the electronics behind
the MIDI revolution as you build your
own computer-controlled music center
Only NRI's innovative, at-home training with the hand-held digital multimeter
in Electronic Music Technology gives also included in your course.
you hands-on experience with the
equipment that's revolutionizing the No previous electronics or music
music industry—Atari SI Series experience necessary
computer with built-in MIDI ports,
Casio HT-3000 synthesizer with No matter what your background,
NRI gives you the skills you need
advanced MIDI operations, and
ingenious MIDI software that to take advantage of today's
links computer keyboard to opportunities in electronic music
synthesizer keyboard—ail technology.
yours to train with and keep! With your experienced NRI
This year, over $1.5 billion instructor always available to
help, you master the basics of
worth of digital electronic
music instruments, from electronic theory step by step,
keyboards to drum gaining the full understanding
machines, will be sold in of electronics that's now so
essential for technicians and
the US. alone. Enthusi-
asts everywhere— musicians alike.
professional musicians You move on to analyze
and recording sound generation tech-
technicians, even niques, digital logic,
people who have microprocessor funda-
never touched amusical mentals, and sampling
instrument before—are discovering the and recording tech
excitement of today's electronic music computer- niques... ultimately
technology. controlled music center. getting first-hand
With its tremendous power, superior experience with today's
At the heart of this excitement is MIDI
graphics capabilities, and built-in MIDI explosive new
(Musical Instrument Digital Interface), an
innovation that's transformed musical interface, the 16/32-bit Atari ST has almost technology as you
instruments into the ultimate computer overnight become the computer of choice explore MIDI, waveshaping, patching,
for today's most knowledgeable electronic sequencing, mixing, special effects, and
peripherals...and opened up awhole new
world of opportunity for the person who musicians. much more.
knows how to use, program, and service Your Casio HT-3000 synthesizer features Plus, even if you've never been involved
this extraordinary new digital equipment. afive-octave, MIDI-compatible digital with music before, NRI gives you enough
Now NRI's breakthrough Electronic keyboard with built-in monitor speakers, basic training in music theory and musical
Music Technology course puts you at the advanced tone editing and writing, pattern notation to appreciate the creative potential
memory, keyboard split, tone and rhythm and far-reaching applications of today's
forefront of this booming new technology
with exclusive training built around aMIDI- banks, chord memory, and dozens more electronic music equipment.
equipped computer, MIDI synthesizer, and state-of-the-art capabilities.
MIDI software you keep.
Send today for FREE catalog
Plus you get ingeniously designed MIDI
software that opens up amazing new If the coupon is missing, write to
Dynamic new technology opens up new creative and technical possibilities.., you NRI Schools, McGraw-Hill Continuing
career opportunities actually build your own 4-input audio Education Center, 4401 Connecticut
mixer/amplifier...and you test the elec- Avenue, NW, Washington, DC 20008.
The opportunities are unlimited for the
tronic circuits at the core of
person who's trained to take advantage of
today's electronic music phenomenon. Now
today's new
equipment
r
-
/lIwerM Schools
you can prepare for ahigh-paying career as
McGraw-Hill Continuing Education Center en
•I1
asound engineer, recording engineer, or 4401 Connecticut Avenue, NW, Washington, DC 20008
road technician.., even start your
own business selling and servicing eCheck One FREE Catalog Only For Career courses approved
under GI bill check tor details.

today's high-tech musical 111Electronic Music Technology

D Microcotnputer Servicing Computer Programming
instruments. Or simply unleash
0 TV/Video/Audio Servicing ID Desktop Publishing and Design
your own musical creativity with
D Security Electronics Fiction/Nonfiction Writing
the breakthrough training and
El Basic Electronics Bookkeeping & Accounting
equipment only NRI gives you.
Name Age
Only NRI gives you hands-on NRI training includes an Atar ST Address
training with today's MIDI technology computer, Casio synthesizer, exclusive
MIDI software, and much more— City/State/Zip
The Atari ST Series computer included in all yours to train with and keep! LAccredited Member. National Home Study Council 140-011_j

your course becomes the heart of your own (TV not supplied)

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 MARK V ELECTRONICS, INC.
Since
ORDER IN CA 1-800-521-MARK 1985 FREE CATALOG & INFORMATION (213) 888-8988
ORDER OUTSIDE CA 1-800-423-FIVE FAX (213) 888-6868
Gives ou more selection on Electronic Kits, Power Am lifiers, Test Instruments and Professional Products.
A indicates the level of difficulty in the assembling of our Products A Beginner AA Intermediate AAA Advanced * Fully Assembled

VIDEO/AUDIO SURROUND SOUND PROCESSOR 60W +60W Stereo Power Amplifier (with Mic. input) Universal Audio/Video KARAOKE Mixer Pre-Amp.
SM-333 AAA* SM-302 AA* SM-888 *
It has inputs for VCR. Video Disc and Compact Disc and can also be
The SM-302 is afully sell-contained power ambler It is designed to be used The SM-8138 is smartly styled and has avariety of functions such as echo mode
used with FM tuners, tape decks and LP discs -in fact anything that
with awide variety of preamplifiers and the exciting Mark Vsurround sound echo depth anda graphic equalizer to suit various environmental and individual
can be connected to your pre-amplifier. processor Assembly is greatly facilitated because all components mount tasles The graphic equalizer is very effective to create amore lively effect
It also has front panel control of dynamic noise reduction DNR • directly on the printed circuit board and interconnect wires are held is a SM-888 features include two microphone lacks for mixing ID (laser disk) and
surround level, effect and time delay up to 50 milliseconds. minimum An added benefit is that hum noiseand distortion are also minimized VCR connection terminals built in phone pre-amp and tape recorder lacks and
Rear panel outputs for front and rear steréo speaker amplifiers. The The SM-302 provides three input lack pairs One pair will accept a high all the facilities you need for live recording An integral signal amplifier allows
impedance microphone the two remaining pairsare for high level and low level sources with varying signal levels to be controlled for best results Additional
unit may be purchased as akit or fully assembled ready to plug in.
input sources These input lacks are selected by apanel mounted slide switch connections are provided for CD (compact disc) and FM tuner inputs
SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS
Frequency response 20 Hz to Frequency response 20Hz to 20 Fequency Response 20Hz to 20KHz
20KHz •Total harmonic distor- KHz •Total harmonic distortion •T H 001%from 20 Hzto 20

MOM
bon Front channel 005%. Rear o01% •Power output 60W per KHz •Input Sensitivity 3my rms •
channel Less than 025%•• Input channel inlo 4ohm load •33W per Input impedance 47 k•AV (audio)
signal voltage 01to 35V •Out- channel into 8 ohm load •Input 300 mu at 47 K•AV fvuleol direct
put Front channel Otto 35V • sensitivity Mic 10mv •Lo 380my connection •FM tuner 300 my at
Rear channel 66V-Delay time 5 •Hi 640 my •Signal to noise ratio 47 k•CD 300my at 47K -AUX 300
to 50 milliseconds • Input im Better than 70 db • Power muai 47 k•MIC 3my at 600 ohms
pedance 47 K • Power consumption IDOW• Dimension Complete Kit 567 00 Useable 300 ohms to 47 k •Line
requirments 100120 VAC 60 Complete Kir 565 00 360 mm 75 mm y200 mm output 0to 15vwith 300 my input Assembled d Tested 0225 00
Assembled 8 Tested 578 00
Hz • Dimensions 14 2 Assembled 8 Tested -$75 00
wide 482 deep. 21-high Equalization 100 Hz ±10 db 250 Hz ±10 db 1KHz ±10 00 3KHz -10 db 10
KHz n10 db •Echo delay time 62 to 220 ms •Power Requirements 110/220
•TM OF NATIONAL SEMICONDUCTOR CORP VAC 50/60 Hz •Power consumption 28 W •Dimensions 17 -W x H
77/70 432 mm 64 mm 200 mm
100W +100W NEW CLASS ADC STEREO PRE 300 W POWER AMPLIFIER (MONO) 110W +80W PORE DC STEREO MAIN POWER AMPURER
AND MAIN AMPLIFIER TA-1500 AAA TA-3600 AAA TA-802 AA
The TA-15001s alully integrated stereo amplifier incl uchno apreamplifier if The TA-3600 is an extremely high power amplifier specifically Modern circuit design utilizes full complementary power output
has inputs for magnetic phono, tuner aux.
designed to reproduce the high dynamic range available on compact and differential cascode input stage. DC coupling provides superb
mic and tape in/out Controls include volume.
discs. transient response. A special output circuit guards against short
balance. mic gain, bass, treble and mid-band
tone controls and input selector it is also It has low noise, high stabil- circuits and overload operation.
possible to connect an external. separate pre- ity low distortion. extended
amplifier Other features are tully come- frequency range and high
O SPECIFICATIONS
mentary DC coupled circuitry with fast acting efficeincy in a compact
Power output 80 watts per channel
speaker protection relay. Power supply com- package two of these units into 8 ohms Total harmonic distor-
ponents are included on the printed circuit with appropriate power tion Less than 005% at rated power
board and requires only the addition of an supply and pre-amplif ier are Intermodulation distortion Less than
external transformer. The Mark V model 005% at rated power Frequency re-
required for stereo repro-
001 is asuitable transformer. Complete Kii 585 00 sponse DC lo 200 KHz. -0d13.-3013
SPECIFICATIONS duction.
Assembled 8 Tested. 5110.00 1watt Power requirements 30 VAC
Power output 80 watts per channel into 8
Complete Kit: $73.70
SPECIFICATIONS Transformer: $43.00 2a 6amp May use Mark V model
001 transformer PC Board 8112' x
Assembled 8 Tested: $95.81
ohms 100 walls per channel into 4ohms • Power output 300 watts sine wave into 8ohms 540 watts music power into 8ohms Complete Kit $45.94
5" x1-1/8' Heat sink 5-1/8 -e2-5/8'
Total harmonic distortion Less than 003°. Frequency response Aux input 5to •Frequency response 10Hz to 20 KHz •Total harmonic distortion Less than 005%
3 rEachl Assembled 8Tested: 059.72
50.000 H1.0 2dB -2 dB •Frequency response Power amplifier section. DC to 200 •Inlermodulalion distortion Less than 0Os ,.•Sensitivity 1Vms at 47K •Power
KHz •Sensitivity Phono 25mV e 47 KAun 150 mV a 47 KMic 6mV a 10 K requirements 60 to 75 VDC at 8 amp • Dimensions 8' • 77," x 2' ,.
Output Tape 150 mV a 47 KPreamp IV'a 600 ohms •Power transformer 26 V
to 32 VAC y2a 6AiMark VMode1001)• PC Board Dimensions 10 5" x613' x
120W MOSFET POWER AMPLIFIER (MONO)
225' •Heat sink 513' x263" 3" (Each) Rack Mount Metal Cabinets TA-477 AA
Use rack mount cabinet LO 1924 or LG 1925
with aluminium panel are This amplifier is designed specifically for low TIM distortion. It
PLEASE SEND ME A COPY OF THE FREE CATALOG- I uses parallel MOSFET output transistors. This is avery popular
suitable for many projects kit because of its superior sound reproducing ability and high
and most of our kits. power reserve. BUILD TWO KITS FOR A PROFESSIONAL
STEREO AMP!

ADDRESS SPECIFICATIONS
PECIFICATIONS
T H D Less Than 0007% •
Power output 120 watts into
ZiTY
We provide transform- 8ohms •Frequency response
8Hz to 20KHz .0-0 4dB •Sen
ers for most of our Mark slimily IV • Power require-
Vamplifier kits. ments 55 VDC a 3 amps
ST-ATE ZIP May use Mark VModel 003
Transformer
AMPLIFIERS KIT ASSEAM. •Free gift for any purchase before April.

MODEL DESCRIPTION MISCEUANEOUS KIT ASSEMB.

IA 78MK2 Digital Voice Memo •• S30 00
TA 50A /13 Multi-Purpose Melody Generator • 12 84 S17 20
TA-50C MultyPurpose Melody Generator • 13 65 18 71
TA-120MK2 35W Class "A" Main Power Mono Amp AA 31 50 4200
TA-300 30W Multi-Purpose Single Channel Amp • 2000 29 00
SM-302 60W .60W Stereo Power Amplifier (with Mic inpul)••* 6700 78 00
TA-323A 30W X2Stereo Pre-main Amp • 31 50 42 80
TA-377A Hi-Quality FE TStereo Pre-Amp ••• 59 95 75 00
TA-400 40W Solid State Mono Amp • 2800 34 93
TA-477 120W Most et Power Mono Amp A• 6803 85 00
TA-800MK2 120W .120W Iow Tim Pre-Main Stereo Power Amp AA 63 92
TA-802 80W .now DC Stereo Main Power Amp AA 45 94 59 72
TA-820A 60W .60W OCL DC Pre-Main Stereo Amp AA 40 39 49 37
TA-1000A 100W Dynamic Class A' Main Power Mono Amp •• 59 69 80 58
TA-1500 100W X2Class A' DC Stereo Pre-Main Amp AAA 73 70 95 81
TA-2200 yet Super Class li" DC Pre-Amp AAA 47 70 58 24
TA-2400A Electronic Echo & Reverberation Amp * 96 00
TA-2500 HO Pm-Amp wit() band graphic equalizer * 68 80
TA-2800 HI-FET IC Pre-Amp wz3 way tone control AA 4800 63 57
TA-3000 Slereo Simulator (For Mono TV or Any Mono Source) AA 2700 3850
TA-3600 300W HO Iii -Fi Power Mono Amp AAA .. 8500 110 00

POWER SUPPUES KIT AWINSINI.

TO-100A 0-15V 2A Regulated DC Power Supply (W/Casel* $69 50
TR-355A 0-15V 5A Regulated DC Power SupPlY • S1565 21 76
TR-355B 0-30V 3A Regulated DC Power Supply A 15 65 21 76
rit -503 0-50V 3A Regulated DC Power Surely •• 16 75 23 65

INSTRUMENTS CT ABMS.
SM-43 3' zMulti-Functional Led 0PM lw/ABS plastic case/AA $34 50 $43 00
SM-48 4,:Hi-Preasion DPM AAA 3800 48 00
SM-48A 4,zHi-Precision DPM (w/ABS plastic Caselaa• 41 20 52 00
SM-49 3,,Multi-Functional LCD 0M P (w/Hold Function)•• 36 00 44 50
SM-I00 150MC Digital Frequency Counter••• 79 00 90 00
FC-1000A 1Gfir Frequency Counter * 179 00

WorldRadioHistory
 Specification
The MOM 85 is a mid range 75mm
soft dome unit of extremely high Variations to specification for MDM 85NE
MDM 85 Iwith enclosure)
standard, both from a design and without enclosure)

high fidelity
technical viewpoint. Overall Dimensions 0 -160mm x113mm
Nominal Power Handling Din 300W Overall Dimensions 0 -160mm x60mm
Transient Power 10ms 1500W Frequency Response 250-5000 Hz
It incorporates the renowned Morel

range Voice Coil Diameter 75mm (3") Resonant Frequency 170 Hz

double magnet and Hexatech voice
Hexatech Aluminium Rmec 39.33
coil techniques, and results in a unit 0.19
Voice Coil Former Aluminium Qms
of above average sels:itiyity with Frequency Response 300-5000 Hz Qes 1.81
extremely low distortion and high Resonant Frequency 250 Hz OIT 0.17
power handling capability. Sensitivity 92 dB (1W/1M) Vas 0.7 litre
Nominal Impedance 8 ohms Nett Weight 1.05 kg

With an output evel of 56d8 Harmonic Distortion

for 96 dI3 SPL <1%
distortion in the area of 400-800Hz is
Intermodulation Distortion
slightly over 1% falling to 0.015%
for 96 dB SPL <0.25%
from 1Khz. Voice Coil Inductance @ 1 Khz 0.2mh
Air Gap Width 1.05mm
There are two different types Air Gap Height 3.0mm
available, one with a rear erdosure Voice Coil Height 6.0mm
and one without (MDM 85NE) Flux Density 1.0T
The type with the rear enclosure can Force Factor IBXL) 4.6 WB/M
Rdc 5.2 ohms
be fitted into a cabinet as an integral
Rmec 37.90
unit. Qms 0.29
Qes 2.66
morel tL.K.) ltd. The MDM 85NE without the rear OIT 0.20
1- Foxtail Road, enclosure can only be fitted into a Vas 0.33 litre
system having a separate housing to Moving Mass including Air Load 7.0 grams
Nacton Ra. (Ransomes)
enclose the unit. A volume of 0.7 Effective Dome Area 63.50 cm 2 . n
88oni
IrrcL stria! Estate.
Dome Material Chemically Treated Fabric
Iwich,IF3 9RT
litre is recommended for this housing,
Nett Weight 1.25 kg
which is essent al to preeert inter-
Eijand
reaction with the bass uait Specifications given are as after 24 hours of running.
T&: (0473) 719212
Telex:987601 Morel G.
compressions and expansions. This
housing must be filled full with R., 50dB duo..., 83mm 1884.
damping material, such as fibreglass 'arum') Chad
10 tr. ..
--. ,4 . _ ___ __
,__.• 11 _

morel or rock wool

mews— PC.I0
3 dB dB

acoustics
_ _
USA 2.83V - -
The Thiele small parameters are given
414 Hariard Street iMETRE
for both types under specif cations.
Bropkline, MA 02146
The contribution of this unit to a _

Tel: (617) 277-6663

suitably designed system will be lie X> .. _

FAX: (6171 277-2415 evident in the clarity and detail given iïnC;BiK
—

in the 500-5303Hz regiol.

11)-10 1

.1
..,... _ _.

L» 2- 5

—
-
Ps. ,
_T= 7._ =
DM— .
— C I C
I
Po. 0.-0 ... ...
MO 40

CP Mg Wee Frog- by_al Zwo Lg.* 80d8 1,02,71121

Morel operate apolicy of continuous product desIon Improvement, consequently, spec,ficabons are subject to alteration without prior nonce
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 10

EVERYTHING YOU EVER WANTED TO ASK ABOUT YOUR CD PLAYER

BUT WERE AFRAID TO KNOW!

After 18 months of painstaking research and several trial pressings, here is the most complete and functional test
package ever available on the market. Created in the studios of Pierre Verany, with the collaboration of the French
audiophile magazine Compact, the final product was submitted to the creators of the CD concept and its
standard—the Philips laboratories in Eindhoven, Holland. Their verdict: "a beautiful piece of work!"

The compact discs in this copiously documented set are unique. For the first time, they offer the consumer atool for
verifying the qualities and defects of agiven CD player, with no required measuring equipment or in-depth technical
knowledge. However, they have been shown to yield startling performance demonstrations even under the strictest of
laboratory conditions.

CHANNEL SEPARATION * FREQUENCY RESPONSE * HARMONIC DISTORTION * SIGNAL-TO-NOISE

RATIO * TRANSIENT SIGNAL RESPONSE * INTERMODULATION DISTORTION * CONVERTER
OVERLOAD EFFECT * CD CUTTING VELOCITY * TRACK PITCH * DROPOUTS

PIERRE VERANY
DIGITAL TEST PV 788031/32 (2 Compact Discs)
106 Demonstration tracks and equipment tests, accompanied by adetailed 68-page instruction booklet.

COMPACT DISC ORDER FORM

Note: Discs and recordings are not returnable for credit or exchange.

NAME
Please send me PV 788031/32 (2 CDs) at $34 per
MAGIC NO.
set plus $2.25 handling. Outside USA, please add $7 for
STREET & NO.
air shipment.
CITY STATE ZIP

MC/ VISA EXP

Postage $
Check/MO 0 MC VISA TOTAL S

OLD COLONY SOUND LAB

PO Box 243, Dept. E91
Peterborough, NH 03458-0243 USA
(603) 924-6371 /924-6526 FAX: (603) 924-9467
Answering machine for credit card orders only. (603)924-6371 belore 9.00 a.m .after 4.00 p.m.. and weekends
Have ,nformation plus MC/VISA available

WorldRadioHistory
F:LEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 FORGING FIBER LINKS
The old saying about advancing two steps forward and one step workers have at least afiber backbone with probably one or two
back has never been more aptly applied than in describing the spurs of fiber linking the distant users with the mainframe or
introduction of Information Technology (IT) to the intelligent the data switch. The situation has progressed with fiber carry-
building. ing all the heavy traffic and copper linking the majority of the
During the early 1980s, many large companies, eager to take individual users.
advantage of the advances in computer technology, installed New buildings have always been easier to deal with in terms
shiny new copper cabling systems to link their PCs and terminals of cabling. Today, the exercise has been further simplified by
with the corporate mainframe. The popular concept of aPC or a major rationalization of building communications require-
aterminal for everyone soon followed. Cabling systems designed ments. This has been achieved through the introduction of in-
as the absolute answer to the needs of their day eventually had tegrated cabling systems designed to handle telecommunications
to be extended to meet the rapid growth in demand for com- and data. The advantages of an integrated cabling system are
puter access. At the same time, communications technology was the variety of communication protocols it can serve and its flex-
developing toward the advent of the local area network, then ibility to allow moves and changes after installation.
toward the wide area network—additional ways of making more Probably the most interesting of the integrated cabling systems
efficient collective use of processing power. is AT&T's SystimaxTM Premises Distributions Systems or PDS.
All these IT innovations offered dramatic improvements in Over 4,000 PDS installations exist in the US and more than one
operating efficiencies for the corporate user, but all carried with hundred in the UK. The system was introduced in 1984 in the
them asevere penalty. Additional cabling on agrand scale was US where about 50% of all data cables within new office build-
required to link these elements of IT with one another. Many ings are part of structured cabling systems. In the UK the pres-
buildings began to groan under the strain. ent volume is around 15% but rising fast. A very high penetra-
Ducts and trunking became overloaded, buildings had to be tion is likely for larger installations.
restructured to accommodate the ever-growing demands for For voice and the less demanding terminals, twisted copper
more and more cable links. What were thought to be definitive pairs will remain satisfactory for the time being. PDS is capable
cabling systems became redundant when major staff re-grouping of handling numerous protocols through the use of baluns, and
was required. Nobody knew which cables went where. Rather it uses the same cables, plugs, and adaptors for voice and data.
than try to use the considerable in situ capital investment—far Simple dual wall socket outlets marked with symbols denoting
from being written down in value—and find out what connected telephone or data use are provided. Changing office layout or
to what and if it would cope, it was easier to install new cables type of service required at the desk is carried out quickly and
and make new connections. easily. Telephones and terminals can be moved from one office
Meanwhile, another force was conspiring to influence the to another with little disruption and expense. Unlike previous
demands of IT. The software industry was developing and im- all-copper cable systems, PDS accommodates simple upgrade
proving its applications. A new level of sophistication was reached paths in line with most future needs. However, for real future
with CAD/CAM, CIM, and DTP and the birth of the workstation proofing, the only solution is to run fiber to the desk, adecision
to handle them. Software became more user-friendly. At the same some major institutions are already implementing.
time, these innovations consumed vast amounts of processor By the end of the century, optical fiber is expected to become
memory and imposed further demands on data communications the dominant medium for data communication. Today, an op-
provision. tical fiber system offers abetter life expectancy than any other
Optical fiber data links were always available as an alternative part of IT. In the meantime, copper cable is far from becoming
to overfilled ducts and high data rates, but the average user had redundant. Peaceful coexistence between the two is the new
no need of such avast signal carrying capacity. The slightly in- way—each fulfilling its own specific function and combining to
creased cost of fiber, coupled with afear of what was perceived form a highly efficient blend of technologies.
as new technology, deterred all but the most far-sighted and When configured as abackbone infrastructure and especially
those with the highest population of terminals. Today, the scene when taken to every desk, optical fiber represents true techno-
has changed and most new premises built for housing knowledge logical future proofing.

Published by Audio Amateur Publications, Inc European Offices: INDIA SPAIN

Elektuur BV Elector Electronics PVT Ltd Resistor Electronica Aplicada
Editor!publisher: Edward T. Dell, Jr. Postbus 75 Chhotani Building Calle Maudes 15 Entio
Editorial Offices: 6190 AB BEEK 52C, Proctor Road, Grant Road (E) 28003 MADRID
305 Union St., P.O. Box 876 The Netherlands BOMBAY 400 007 Editor: Agustin Gonzales Buelta
Peterborough, NH 03458-0876 USA Telephone: 011 31 4490 89444 Editor Surendra lyer SWEDEN
Telex 56617 (elekt nI) ISRAEL Electronic Press AB
Telephone: 603-924-9464 (National FAX: 011 31 4490 70161 Elektorcal Box 5505
or +1 (603) 924-9484 (International) Managing Director: M.M.J. Landman P 0 Box 41096 14105 HUDDINGE
FAX (603) 924-9467 (National) TEL AVIV 61410 Editor Bill Cedrum
or +1 (603) 924-9467 (International) Overseas Editions: Publisher: M. Avraham UNITED KINGDOM
Advertising: Rally Dennis FRANCE NETHERLANDS Down House
Telephone: (603) 924-9750 Elektor sarl Elektuur BV Broomhill Road
FAX (603) 924-9467 Les Trois Tilleuis Peter Treckpoelstraat 2-4 LONDON SW18 4.10
Subs«Miens: Katharine Gactwah B.P. 59; 59850 NIEPPE 6191 VK BEEK England UK
Elektor Electronics USA Editors: D.R.S. Meyer Editor: P.E.L. Kersemakers EdItorlPubilsher Len Seymour
Post Office Box 876, G.C.P. Raedersdorf PAKISTAN
Peterborough, New Hampsire 03458 GERMANY Electro-shop
Subscriptions to Elektor Electronics USA are Elector Verlag GmbH 35 Naseem Plaza
available ONLY in the fifty United States, Susterfeld Stresse 25 Lasbella Chawk
Canada, Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands and 5100 AACHEN KARACHI 5
those Pacific territories adminstered by the Editor: E.J.A. Krempelsauer Editor Zain Ahmed
United States of America. GREECE PORTUGAL
Elektor EPE Ferreira 8 Bento Lda.
Kariskaki 14 R.D. Estef-83-ni, 32-1° Printed in the United States of America.
16673 Voula—Athena 1000 LISBOA
Editor: E. Xanthoulis Editor: Jeremias Sequeira ISSN: 1051-5690

WorldRadioHistory

ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991

I ELECTRONICS SCENE I
ECONOMICAL 8-CHANNEL VHF
TWO-WAY MOBILE 68000 TRAINING SYSTEM
Midland LMR has introduced a compact Intelligent Systems Solutions Corp. has
8-channel programmable wideband two-way introduced a 68000-based microprocessor
FM mobile radio. For VHF use, the 70-1336 training system. It consists of a68008 micro-

I
offers adjustable output power of 15-30W A COMPUTER-SIMULATED processor, two serial ports, atimer/counter/
and covers a24MHz frequency range (136- ELECTRONICS LABORATORY square wave generator, abuilt-in logic probe,
150MHz or 150-174MHz) at rated specifica- Global Specialties has announced PRO- adual speed 8/2MHz clock, 64K static RAM
tions, without retuning. This PLL frequency- TOLAB, a computer-simulated electronics (32K battery backed up), and 32K EPROM.
synthesized mobile has built-in tone- and laboratory for building and testing circuits. Two slots are available for wirewrap experi-
digital-coded squelch (CTCSS/DCS), ran- Included is an instructional experiment ments or for system expansion. Also, the
domly programmable by channel in any com- workbook. Together, program and workbook trainer has aremovable breadboard with ac-
bination. It features adie-cast chassis and, help you discover fundamental electronic cess to the system's signals.
with abracket support on the mount, meets design principles. The lab comes with volt-
or exceeds MIL Standard 810C/D for shock meter, ammeter, dual-trace oscilloscope,
and vibration. ohmmeter, wattmeter, and sweep generator.
The mobile measures 2" x7" x87/8". Op- Protolab is also stocked with resistors, ca-
tions include priority scanning of 40 chan- pacitors, inductors, current sources, and AC
nels per second, aslide rail mounting kit, a and DC voltage sources.
Each experiment is conducted on the sim-
ulated Protoboard breadboard. You construct
operating circuits by placing the components
with amouse, and you use the test instru-
ments to probe the circuit's operation. Volt-
ages and currents can be measured on the
meters and waveforms on the dual trace The trainer has a debugger with com-
oscilloscope. mands to deposit, examine, download, and
Protolab was designed to operate on IBM upload programs, and it can execute asingle
PCs (PC, XT, AT, 286, and 386) or Macin- instruction or subroutine. The debugger al-
toshes (MAC512E, MACXL, MAC Plus, lows seven permanent breakpoints and a
MAC SE, and MAC II). The PC version re- temporary one. The system's disassembler
quires amouse, mouse driver, 384K RAM, shows how the condition codes are affected,
and CGA (640 x200) video, but not ahard and it shows the privilege level, as well as
drive. the instruction itself. You can use either ser-
DTMF decoder, and aDTMF encoder micro- The PROTOLAB packages are priced at ial port to interface with the trainer.
phone with ANI. $99.95 (PC) and $129.95 (Macintosh). To The suggested retail price is $749. Contact
For additional information, contact order or for more information, contact I.S.S.C. at 6521 S. Terrace, Tempe, AZ
Midland LMR, Marketing Dept., 1690 N. Global Specialties, 70 Fulton Terrace, New 85283, (602) 829-6503.
Topping, Kansas City, MO 64120, (800) Haven, CT 06512, (203) 624-3103, FAX (203)

II
643-5263, ext. 1690. 468-0060.
FIELD SERVICE PARTS TESTER
B&K Precision is offering anew hand-held

I LOGIC CONTROLLER CONTROLS SOLENOIDS

parts tester with digital readout, designed for
field service of general industry applications.
Electronically controlling machinery, equip- ple terminal or with an MS-DOS based PC. The Model 815 tests capacitance from 0.1pF
ment, and instruments using pneumatic or The SBC-64A system provides 32 opto- to 20µF in capacitors, switches, and other
hydraulic solenoids is now easier, thanks to isolated inputs and 32 open collector outputs, components with an accuracy of 0.75% to
aprogrammable logic controller from BAS- all marked with LEDs for visual confirma- 1.5%. Resistance measurement spans from
ICON. The Single Board Controller's 7" x tion of operation. It has RS-232/422/485 for 0.19 to 20MII. Transistors are tested by meas-
9" size and low power requirement (1W at program development and machine-to- uring hFE values (gain) and 'CEO (leakage).
24V) allow for a sealable, non-vented en- machine or host communication. The system SCRs, diodes, and LEDs are tested for for-
closure, protecting the system from harsh in- can be expanded with more memory, A/D ward junction voltage. Batteries are tested
dustrial and commercial applications. and D/A connections, clock/calendar, digital under load for voltage output.
During beta-testing, the SBC-64A was used I/O, keyboard, and display. For easy trouble- The 815 can withstand damage from a
to control machine tools, carton folders, shooting and maintenance, the SBC-64A is 5-foot fall, from overloads, and from water.
camera motion and lens zooming, and equipped with quick connect, industrial Also, its case seals out grease, dirt, and other
audio/visual mixing. Because of its conve- grade screw terminals. After the operational contaminants. Other features include a31
/
2

nience and accuracy, the built-in floating logic has been programmed and tested, the digit 0.8" LCD readout, tilt stand for bench
point arithmetic enabled the unit to position program can then be moved to the built-in use, test leads, and component insertion
commercial satellite receiving antennae. EEPROM, where subsequent power-up auto- sockets.
Compared to other Ladder Logic Control- matically runs it. To receive more information, contact B&K-
lers, the SBC-64A provides greater flexibil- For further information, contact BASICON Precision, Maxtec International Corp., 6470
ity with its built-in Basic language. The sys- at 14273 N.W. Science Park Dr., Portland, W. Cortland St., Chicago, IL 60635, (312)
tem can be programmed with either asim- OR 97229, (503) 626-1012. 889-9087.
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 ELECTRONICS SCENE I
ELECTROFORMER SERIES 2003 SYNTHESIZED
OF BALANCED 110 DEVICES FUNCTION GENERATOR
The EF201 and EF202 from Audio Teknol Global Specialties announces the 2003, a
ogy are high performance input (FT202) and synthesized function generator. The 2003
output (FT201) devices providing true equiv- has a frequency range of DC to 1.6MHz,
alent transformer balancing action, along
with lower distortion and wider bandwidth
I NEUTRIK GETS
THE MESSAGE ACROSS
Neutrik USA has introduced three models
with sine, square, triangle, and ramp out-
puts. Up to 16 preset frequencies can be pro-
than actual I/O transformers. Both devices grammed into memory and sequenced in the
of its Infomatic digital recording and an-
provide high common mode rejection ratios "frequency hop" mode, making the unit
nouncing system (the 4000 System, the Com-
at least equal to those of audio quality trans- ideal for repetitive test applications, such as
pact, and the Mini). Designed for recording,
formers, and the EF201 maintains rejection amplifier performance checks or production
storing, and replaying digitally stored sound,
during clipping overloads. The devices use environments. Tone bursts can be generated
the microprocessor-based system is ideal for
aDielectric isolated (Di) process developed using the external trigger/gate feature, and
use in airports, museums, police depart-
specifically for high performance audio ap- internal linear/log sweep is available across
ments, and railroad stations, where high-
plications. This process enables discrete the entire frequency range.
fidelity reproduction of sound is required.
quality audio transistors of matched NPN
The 4000 System is expandable to aplay-
and PNP types to be fabricated on amono-
ing time of 68 minutes and can store up to
lithic structure.
256 messages. With 32 playback channels,
To receive further information, contact
the Infomatic 4000 can provide service for
Audio Telçnology, Inc., 7558 S.W. Bridgeport
32 customers at once. An optional interface
Rd., Portland, OR 97224, (503) 624-0405,
makes the unit keypad interactive with the
FAX (503) 624-0194.
message recipient. The 4000 features a 100
telephone line capacity; three bandwidths

FIRST IN THE 10comm LINE

(3.5, 7, and 14kHz); optional disk drive; and
SRAM, DRAM, or EPROM. Use with other 711111111111111"
Infomatic systems allows for unlimited chan-
OF COLOR MONITORS
nel availability. The 2003 has a32-character two-line LCD
The CM-4210, a 1,024 x 768, .28 dot pitch
The Compact is a recording/playback/ display and akeyboard and rotary encoder
color monitor from I0comm, produces pic-
memory system. This model comes with an for selecting functions and tuning frequen-
ture stability and clarity by working like a
internal voltage regulator and connections cies. The rotary encoder allows analog style
fixed-frequency machine. But it still scans
for playback, remote, and record. Its inter- tuning; the keyboard provides direct access
three main frequencies for compatibility.
nal memory can be SRAM (64 sec.), EPROM, and mode selection. An optional RS-485
The CM-4210 comes with 6-foot cables
or DRAM (128 sec.). serial interface lets you set functions from
and has ergonomic control placement, extra-
The Mini is adigital playback unit, com- aPC. Multiple generators can operate on a
wide system ventilation, and power supplies
plete with a DC power supply. It features single loop, each with its own address, mak-
that take anything from 88-264V AC. The
32 seconds of playing time, output to tele- ing the unit ideal for automated testing ap-
monitor is upwardly compatible from VGA
phone or loudspeaker, PAXB compatibility, plications. The digitally controlled output is
to 800 x600 to 1,024 x768. Its tilt-and-swivel
and EPROM memory. 20V p-p into an open circuit, 10V p-p in 509,
base moves with ease. The monitor has a
Neutrik offers afree Infomatic system con- with DC offset adjustments.
track failure rate of a fraction of 1%, well
figuration on request. For more information, Contact Global Specialties, 70 Fulton Ter-
below the industry's standard of 2%, and it
contact them at 195-S3 Lehigh Ave., Lake- race, New Haven, CT 06512, (203) 624-3103,
meets or exceeds US DHHS standards, as
wood, NJ 08701, (908) 901-9488. FAX (203) 468-0060.
well as the German TUV.

I
Having amaximum resolution of 1,280 x
1,024, with 17 diagonal inches, the CM-8720 SUPPORT FOR MULTIVENDOR STANDARD ON THE PC BUS
takes care of full- and split-screen displays, National Instruments, Data Translation, a-card modules slide into the passive back-
CAD, multitasking, and windows. I0comm Strawberry Tree, Analogic, Sciteq, Guide plane and are interchangeable with any PC
offers support programs ranging from direct Technology, Computer Boards, and Rapid card manufactured according to the Industry
RMA handling to insured warranties. Systems have announced their support for Standard Architecture (ISA). The modules'
PCXI, a multivendor standard on the PC 1.2" slot spacing provides shielding of the
bus. Designed by Rapid Systems to satisfy PC card and space for large components.
the need for amodular instrumentation, data A typical PCXI test system consists of a
acquisition, and control standard on the PC power supply module, aCPU module, and
bus, PCXI accommodates hundreds of PC a video module, plus as many instrument-
cards within one specification. on-a-card modules as the application re-
The PCXI standard establishes the basis quires. PCXI is upward compatible to 386/
for the first generation of low-cost automated 486 architecture. Also, additional memory,
I0comm also manufactures the 10-101 test systems—based on the PC, software disk storage devices, IEEE 488 interfaces,
WC keyboard. Its rolling surface provides a standards, and card instruments. PCXI spec- printers, plotters, and modems (phone/fax)
place to rest your palms to aid in typing ification allows for awide range of test sys- can extend its ATE capabilities.
comfort. tem configurations, from a small, portable For more information, contact Tom Bar-
For further information, contact I0comm, system with few instruments to alarge ATE deen, President, Rapid Systems, 433 N. 34th
12700 Yukon Ave., Hawthorne, CA 90250, system with numerous devices. St., Seattle, WA 98103, (206) 547-8311, FAX
(213) 644-6100, FAX (213) 644-6068. PCXI is module based. The instrument-on- (206) 548-0322.
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 14

MULTIFUNCTION MEASUREMENT
CARD FOR PCs

PART 1: DESIGN BACKGROUND AND CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

110

The high-performance insertion card described in this article allows

your IBM PC-XT, PC-AT or 100% compatilble to measure direct
voltage at 12-bit accuracy, as well as frequency and a host of other
parameters related to pulse-shaped signals. The accuracy and
versatility afforded by the card are of a level associated with much
more expensive, industrially rated products. The menu-driven
control software developed for /his exciting project allows you to
keep tabs on up to eight voltages quasi-simultaneously, while up to
eight remaining inputs can be used for time-related measurements
including frequency, duty factor and pulse duration, not forgetting
the event counter. Connected to the senscrs and timing devices of
your choice, this card turns a PC into a powerful central controller in
acomplex measurement and control system.

J. Ruffell

A LTHOUGH its ability to deal with num-

bers is often the main reason for using
tion of the card allows analogue quantities in
the form of voltages to be translated into
Block diagram
aPC, it is interesting as well to look at inter- their digital equivalents, which are numbers The block diagram in Fig. 1 shows the
facing such a machine to the real world, that can be processed and evaluated by the general structure of the measurement card.
which, as most of us see it, is analogue rather PC. Two inputs are available for this pur- A number of buffers and an address decoder
than digital. Invariably, a PC needs to be pose, each fitted with an eight-channel are connected between the PC expansion bus
fitted with aspecial interface card to allow it multiplexer for multi-point measurements. on the one hand, and two programmable pe-
to handle analogue quantities such as volt- The software allows one of these channels to ripheral interfaces (PPIs) and one analogue-
age, temperature, pressure, or relative hu- be selected for accurate monitoring and ana- to-digital converter (ADC), on the other. The
midity. The card described in this article is lysis. In addition to this versatile voltmeter PPIs take care of the communication be-
such an interface. Effectively, it turns your function, the card can also function as afre- tween the PC and anumber of lines of the
PC into a multifunction measurement sta- quency meter combined with apulse/pause ADC (which functions as a voltmeter) as
tion. (duty factor), apulse-on/off time meter, and well as the communication with the ICs that
The analogue-to-digital conversion func- an event counter. form the frequency meter.
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 MULTIFUNCTION MEASUREMENT CARD FOR PCs

1M1. 4/,
1
MAIN SPECIFICATIONS
K4 /K5 XT-slot

• DC voltmeter
- ADC input range: — 5V

- ADC resolution: 1.22 mV (12-bits)

buffer butter
- ADC conversion time: 3ps
- Level shifter: O-5 V
data bus address bus
(input —2.5 V to +2.5 V)
- 8 multiplexed inputs with 7optional re-
sistive dividers and 1adjustable attenu-
ator (0.1 — 300 V, auroranging)

PPI PP1 address • Frequency meter

A-D
8255 8255 decoder
converter - Range: 0.0025 Hz — 10 MHz
- Max. error 0.0001%
- Accuracy: 6digits
- Autoranging
8 multiplexed inputs (TTL)
Arithmetic period measurement
- Internal or external reference
frequency
frequency supply
multiplexer multi ple xe r
meter • Event counter
- Range: 32 bits
- Max. court frequency: 10 MHz
- User-defined trigger edge

• Pulsetime measurement
- Range: 0—400 s
- Resolution: 0.1 us
amp ifier /
K3 adjust limiter K6 High/low indication
attenuator
Arithmetic duty cycle measurement

Kid) K2 (b
12r
analogue "C21- "Ct digital
analogue digital
900124 .1 .11
300H; position 11 310H). Table 1shows the
functions of the addresses assigned to the
Fig. 1. Block diagram of the PC measurement card, showing the general structure of the card.
design and the main buses used for data and control signals. The analogue circuitry is found back at
the top of the circuit diagram. To the right we
The bus interface merits a few words tal components on the card are powered di- see an analogue multiplexer, 102, which is
only, since it has been used in previously rect from the PC's 5-V supply. used to control a stepped attenuator built
published circuits in this magazine. The ad- from discrete components (R23 —R32). The at-
dress and data buffers ensure that the load- tenuator is followed by achopper-stabilized
Entering into details amplifier (Ref. 2), 101, whose output signal
ing of the relevant PC bus lines is kept to a
minimum. The buffers are followed by an Although ablock diagram is quite useful to is fed to asecond analogue multiplexer.
address decoder formed by aprogrammable become acquainted with the overall struc- The component values in the attenuator
array logic IC (PAL). The PAL outputs are ture of acircuit, afully detailed circuit diag- and the chopper opamp circuit are chosen
used to give the two PPIs and the ADC their ram is required to understand how the such that the measurement ranges 0.1 —0.3 —
proper addresses in the PC's I/O map. Here, various functions are realized in practice. 1—3— 10 —30 — 100 —300 V are created on
the function of the PPIs is to allow those ICs Hence, the operation of the measurement channel IO. The other inputs of the multi-
that are either relatively slow or not really in- card will be discussed with reference to the plexer accept the signals on connector K3.
tended for use in acomputer environment, circuit diagram in Fig. 2. Control signals ASELO, ASEL1 and ASEL2
to be connected to the PC expansion bus. By Connectors K4 and Ks (to the left in the determine which of the eight signals at the
virtue of the PPIs, it is possible to apply soft- circuit diagram) connect the circuit to the multiplexer inputs is fed to ADC IC4, via
ware control to the multiplexers and the dis- XT-slot in the PC. Circuits ICi, 10 and IC3 buffer IC913 and level shifter IC9A. The ASEL
crete frequency meter, and also to monitor, provide the necessary buffering. The first, signals are supplied by one of the PPIs, IC4.
by means of polling, the status of several ICt, is abidirectional type since its task is to The arrangement allows amaximum of eight
components in the system. buffer the databus, on which two-way com- signals to be applied sequentially to the
The ADC chip used here is suitable for di- munication is required. The other two buf- ADC. In the current circuit configuration,
rect connection to acomputer bus. Its soft- fers work in one direction only. input It (pin 1of connector K3) is used to
ware selection is accomplished by the OUTO The address decoding is accomplished by calibrate the ADC. The calibration circuit can
output signal supplied by the address 10, aPAL. This IC, which is supplied ready- be disabled by fitting jumper JPio, when
decoder. The EOC (end of conversion) and programmed, has been used before in aPC input It may be used as an additional meas-
BUSY signals supplied by the ADC are read extension card project, see Ref. 1. Apart from urement input.
via aPPI. the three selection signals, the PAL also sup- It should be noted that inputs Ii to 17 are
The power supply is symmetrical. The plies the reset signal for the ADC interrupt not fitted with aprotective network, so that

±12 V supply of the PC is stepped down to bistable, IC6A, and the enable signal for bus any attenuator used on these inputs must in-
±8 V on the card, and is also used to derive buffer ICt. The base address of the card can clude aform of protection against overvolt-
special reference potentials of ±5 V. The digi- be set with the aid of jumper JPi (position A: age. The simplest way to accomplish this is
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
16
COMPUTERS AND MICROPROCESSORS

probably to fit a pair of

anti-parallel diodes. Note,
however, that these
diodes are not required, 12V 637
TL431CLP
even undesirable (be- ElEMI OUK5+
UADC+

o
I
639
cause of their leakage cur- C19
rent), when measuring mim

sensor voltages that can I C 2n

640
22n"r17V
70. 1075V
••
100n 7176
25V
1% 24 BAT85
not exceed the operating A
V
A4N
641
area of the multiplexer IC4
20 C22 c ;2 4
(±5 V). Depending on the 48N4 DO 16
R07872 IN

22n 642 Tn Ir7p

00/8 AJNO3
desired measurement
"
16V 7 DI 15 D1/9 CLK

e
R38 1% 02 14
range, you must calculate
D2/10
•EEO] TL431CLP
D3 13 D3/11OUT
12V
the values of R6 to R19
1.1 K5_ D4 11 Dl
D5 10
135 SONO
yourself. It will be clear 12V
O 23
06
D7
9
8
56 VREF

that high-value resistors a 07

1%
22 iffl ; 60,0 3
are preferred to keep EV3 re> VSS CI
100n
ground currents in check. 20 19 23 /1 0

Each resistor junction in C3

the attenuator may be de- 01 — UOA-0 7' 06

7
—
ilL717- rai2 A C

coupled with a capacitor 100n 730,75e

(C33 —C39).
Level shifter IC9A U ADC-

allows negative voltages

to be measured. With the 804•ADC

aid of the buffer/ampli- +5V PAD

5004
fier ahead of it, the level DO 34
+511
shifter enables voltages 7oI 33
3
Dl PA3 1 GATE
40 WOO
PA4
between —2.5 V and DO
DI
8A 17 DI
013
03 PAS
39 WD1
DI 30
+2.5 V to be measured at 02
7A
6A 5
le
15
02
D3 / 88
29
04 PA6
PA7
37 WD3
03 74
an accuracy of 1.22 mV. DI
SA
B3
14 04 '
/,24/7// / //7/IV l(/ // D

4A HCT 13 OS ./ PBS
16 P80

9e
8I
5 07
The heart of the circuit 05
06
3A
A6
245
B6
12 D6 P131
19 P6 \
28g
,11 .
2A
is aType AD7572A anal- D7 Al
01E1 67
11 D7,4
3 2
IC13
PB2
P83
22 P84
ogue-to-digital converter ._J'° 82C55 p „,
P84 23 PBS

from Analog Devices. ,80 _4 9 PB6

24 P86
25 P87 \
60 PBI
This IC is supplied in four 137-7" AI
Al
II ASELO
versions. The -A suffix RO
PCO
PC

version used here is the 1602 pc 2 16 ASEL2

1602
258 1E103 pc , 17 KSELO'
1603 ii7SET
fastest with a conversion 1604
246 pc . 13 KSELI
236 IR05 P05 12 KSEL2
time of only 3 µs. It re- 1605
1606
226 IRO6 pc , 11 1ROE
IRO? pc7 10 SCAN
quires a 4-MHz quartz 1607

crystal, Xi, and awire link

5V
in place of resistor Ri. If - 0 `-0 -0 -0
12
JP7 JP6 JP5 JP4 JP3 JP2 11
you feel you can make do 13
12
+12V 3
with a longer conversion El J"

time, you may want to use

4 PULO
one of the slower, less ex- 17 19
PAO
PAI
3 FS LI

pensive, versions of the A2

2
IA I 171
18 1
e Év ocVA
34
DO PA2
2 FSEL2

A3
28A
4 1A2 16 2 ,--,- IC7 33
DI PA3
AD7572. These, however, AI
27A
6 IA3 17.
, 3e_. _._1, e 16L8 *
32
02 PM
40
26A 8164 'Ws 12 4 x, 31 39
require a lower quartz AS 24 03 PAS
A6
25A 11 2A1 DVI 9 6 M OUTO 30
Dl P66
38

crystal frequency, say, Al

24A 13 2A2 HCT
2, 2Y2 7 e cMd.r
14 29 37

OVA 5 , „
8 05 PA7
AS
23A 15 2A , 15 on 13 2

1.25 MHz for a version 69

22A 17 264
T« M 2Y4
3 7a IS lawn
27
D7 pc , 14 1/i4

PCI 15 REFF
with aconversion time of ONO
318 I±119 11 „ 2 16 01V

10 µs. At the lower clock ONO D

JP1
A IC14 PC3 IT
pc . 13 F
ONO
frequencies, it may be •
82C55 PCS 12

A
31A 2 AO PC6 11
AS 1A1 ry 2
1
necessary to adapt the
4 1 18
30A 16 O 9 AO PC7 10 LOAD
Al A2
iA3 IC3 173 211_. 8
values of capacitors C5 'ORO
146
8 1A4 174
12 MlitS
Al
P ., 18 CO
11 74
and Co to ensure that the IOWA
136 261 271

7
05901% >Mel aa P61 18 GI s ,

AEN
IA 13 262 HCT 272 36
WR P62 20

oscillator starts reliably. RESET

28 15
17
2A , 244 273 5 RESETL RESET 35
RESET P83\21 C3
— 2A4 re 274 L. 2 Cl
When the older version of 12V P84
m
2
6 23 CS
-12V
the AD7572A, the
19 24 C8
PBS
P67 25
Ci

AD7572, is used, resistor ararr

RImust be fitted at its ap- 5V
C27-.032 = 100n
propriate position on the
PCB.
T
C25 1C1 C29 105 C31 za e0 C28 ici9 C32
IC16
The ADC used has an
A
IC10 IC13 ,,, A C27

?
17i, g
i
l "'" IC6 ic 7 1C8 2,, IC12 IC14 '"''' 9»
1 IC18 am 1C20
IC22
internal reference that
supplies a voltage of — O m (:?1,------ (::2,----- ? ? lev ? (i)

5.25 V at pin 2. This volt- D

age is used for the on-chip

A-D conversion circuitry
as well as for the pre-
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 MULTIFUNCTION MEASUREMENT CARD FOR PCs Eri
viously mentioned level
shifter. The voltage level
at pin 22 of the ADC indi-
8V cates whether or not the

*ã3 j

34 * 36 * 38
*39 K3
443
O
644
A-to-D conversion pro-
cess is complete. This
allows the computer to
•M MOM sia. 15

65 0 0 14 monitor the conversion

7 X7 SI
IC9b xs 0 0 12 status with the aid of the
11. 9 xs 15 9
00 -0
JPIO
011
o PPI, although this type of
0

413 515 517

o
54
74 I
6
check is really only useful
X3 LI ggi .
HCT 72

ASELO 11 oo 1
4051 X2 " 4

ASEL 1 lo X1 00
2
when using either' aslow
9
t4
500C/
5864.2 X13 12.
V

7
EN
7 2n UT ADC or a very fast com-
puter. In most cases, acon-
°-1 version time of 3-pis is too
e ° A
umux_ UK5+ fast in any case for the
IC11
TLC2652 2x
computer to execute the
K1
relevant start instructions,
431 432
1N4148

*see text
420 01
° and evaluate the results.
This is particularly so
423 424 425 42121328
5V when the control program
is written in ahigher lan-
guage.
C41 522 C43 XX ee The above discussion
M1M
IC12
10n
17 IS in may suggest that a fast
74HCT4051
A
C12 ABC 05 TEE X ADC is extravagant and a
:A7
e •
11 09 6 3
superfluous luxury. Bear
D A
in mind, however, that a
UK5- 2-0
!
-2 ulm
O fast ADC can take more
ee Umux-
C)

/ //////////// ////////// // //////./// ///////// // samples of a measurand

within a short period,
5V allowing the software to
SC5 = 7411CTO8
8V0 0 0 04+ IC6 =74HCT74 calculate the correct value
IC8 = 74HCTO2
8V0 0 0 04- IC9 =0P200 K6
on the basis of the sam-
IC15 =74HCT86
pled values. This type of
IC19 =74HCT74 24
2 25
5 3 1403

U K5-9 IO U MOX-
IC20 =74HCT74
07
12 F7 16 0 21 WD2 software-based filtering
3 F6 14 0 0 19 WD1
FSELO 11 e IC22
of
ee 14 F5 12 0 0 17 WOO effectively eliminates the
FSEL1 /0 15 F4 tO o P67
adverse effects of spurious
FSEU
9
e 74 ." I
„. F3 8 0 0 _12_ II16
5 HCT „ pulses and noise on the
151 "
ei 3 Fl 4 0 c.._. 1134
JP9 5V DO `O 200 7 113, measurement results, and
D C
2112_
brings true 12-bit resolu-
.

8 J .Ln_
cp V.
C13
• .22 0 1 P80 tion within easy reach.
OSC «1M
10MHz 5V
72n
NC V- D5

5V BAT85 536
A different
I=1 principle
BAT85
o Dg

\\\\ \\ 5 12
CLK1 D e D
1C0 SC19b
10
A 74 10 IC19a
o
LS 5
2C0
IV
3
CLK 0 CLK - a
15
292 4 :11 2
1Cc i
i icia
14 3
D o 7 4
2 1C2 74
12
CLK2 CLR 3 ice HCT
5V
5 153 9

f(OFF
JA
14
2C3 2Y
O
A 2
A.CNT
2
CO 6 60 18
B
VDD
15 5V
BI
%1 4
5
82 IC21
D C14
C3 3 M1M
83
START C4 17 gg 1
-57060 22n
16
5 II
C6 E
13 6
11 ri• >••• C7
87
TEST

Fri, O
CNT Ç TS5 g
IC20b IC20a
433 12
O8 a 3
-
7
SCAN
2 10

4 1Î11:
5V

5V

r4./‘ NT

900124 -1-1

WorldRadioHistory
18 ( ()NIP( IIis \ND NW It(ll'Itot

FREQUENCY MEASUREMENT: A DIFFERENT APPROACH

1 3

f
m
Tm
1
4-el
p 1
Tm
fm T9

T 9
900124 -1-13

+2n f
m '= 2'n •f
m

this measurement method is far matically, this requirement can

from ideal. be expressed as:
A much more efficient method to
determine the frequency of asig- f
m < 1x10 -6 f
o [1]
nal is based on period time meas-

L f
m ':510Hz
urements, where acircuit counts
pulses supplied by astable refer-
ence during one period of the
measurand (see Fig. 2). In this
where fm is the frequency to be
measured, and f
supplied by
o the frequency

the reference
source. Since the reference
Tm ' way, the measurand switches the operates at 10 MHz in this case,
• reference on and off. As in the equation [1] rules a maximum
'simple measurement system, value of f m of 10 Hz. This means
the accuracy achieved is de- that the scaled-down frequency,
pendent on the frequency to be fm, must comply with equation
measured — since a fixed refer- [1]. In other words: 'm < 10 Hz.
ence frequency is used, the ef- In terms of hardware, the input
fect of the ±1-error rises with the signal is scaled down by IC16, a
frequency to be measured. This 74LS292. This IC allows adivisor
is caused by the 'gate time' be- 2' to be programmed, where n
coming shorter with higher input may take discrete values from 2
frequencies, so that fewer peri- to 31. From this, it can be shown
900124-1-15 ods of the reference source can that n must comply with
be counted. Remember, the ef-
fect of a ±1-pulse error is ten n> fm /10) /(logic 2) [2]
times greater with 1,000 counted
pulses than with 100 counted to ensure the required measure-
In all probability, the simplest example, a6-digit (0.0001%) ac-
pulses. ment accuracy.
way of measuring frequency is curate measurement of a 1 Hz
The accuracy of this type of From equation [2] it follows that
counting the number of periods signal would require a gate time
measurement may be increased fm must be known before n can
(p) of a signal within afixed gate of 277.8 hours! Clearly, this is a
by lowering the input frequency. be computed, while at the same
time (To). Unfortunately, this totally impractical measurement
This is fairly simple to accom- time n must be known for accur-
method has one important disad- time.
plish by dividing the input signal ate measurement of f m. Although
vantage: the so-called ±1-error, In addition to lengthening the
by a known factor. As illustrated this looks like achicken-and-egg
which means that the last pulse gate time, the accuracy may also
in Fig. 3, the real frequency may problem, acceptable results may
in a measurement or conversion be improved by first multiplying
then be computed on the basis of be obtained for the setting of nby
is always undetermined. Owing the frequency to be measured
the lowered frequency and the performing a rough approxima-
to this error, the accuracy of the with a known reference fre-
divisor. tion of fm .In practice, the prob-
simple measurement drops ine- quency, and subsequently
Briefly recapitulating, the method lem is solved as follows. First, f m
vitably with the input frequency measuring the product fre-
of counting reference periods is estimated with the aid of apre-
(see Fig. 1). Although the effect quency. The result may then be
has two advantages over count- liminary measurement, carried
of the ±1-error can be reduced by used to calculate the original
ing input signal periods: out with a factor, n, of nought.
increasing the gate time, meas- input frequency. Unfortunately,
This factor results in the shortest
urement times rapidly rise to ex- multiplying signals whose fre-
-the time required for the meas- measurement time. If the result
cessive lengths when dealing quencies differ by aconsiderable
urement equals the period time of the preliminary measurement
with low frequencies. For amount is not so simple, so that
of the (scaled-down) input fre- is greater than 10 Hz, the fre-
quency, and thus remains with- quency is entered as fm in equa-
2 in acceptable values; tion [2]. Next, the computer
the fact that signal division may calculates the optimum value of
be applied instead of signal n, and sets the programmable
multiplication allows a simpler divider to the required divisor.
ciicuit to be used. Next, the real measurement fol-
i4
Tm
lows. The result of it (I' m ), multi-
In practice plied by 2" provides the
Among the target requirements frequency of the input signal, at
of the PC measurement card was the required accuracy of 6digits.
a maximum permissible meas- When the preliminary measure-
urement error of 1 p.p.m. (or ment results in avalue of f m smal-
1x10 -4 %) as a result of the ±1- ler than 10 Hz, the 'first go' is
error. This value was not set just already sufficiently accurate, and
like that — it can be shown that thus obviates asecond measure-
900124-1-14
it is the maximum permissible ment.
error if the measurement is to
have 6-digit accuracy. Mathe-

WorldRadioHistory
II Iolt FIlt IIto\ s \t R1 1991
 19
MULTIFUNCTION MEASUREMENT CARD FOR PCs

XOR gate is connected to ardivider, IC16, a signal at the Q output of IC2oA indicates that
Address Function multiplexer, ICts, and aNOR gate, IC8B. The the measurement is complete. Next, the pro-
multiplexer thus has three input signals: the gram reads the counter state. The pulse 'low'
3x0 Read ADC lower byte input signal (in true or inverted form), the or 'high' time is simple to compute since it is
3x1 Read ADC upper byte input signal divided by 2", and the 10-MHz the counter value divided by the reference
clock signal supplied by oscillator block frequency. The resolution of this measure-
3x2 Read ADC lower byte ment is 100 ns.
OSO. Control signals REFF and DIV on the
3x3 Read ADC upper byte A and B inputs determine which input sig- As indicated above, the 'high' time of the
nals appear at the multiplexer outputs, 1Y input signal is measured with I /N not active.
and 2Y. The multiplex configuration is When this signal is active, IC5A inverts the
3x4 Port A IC13 (input)
shown in Table 2. input signal, and the 'low' time is measured
3x5 Port B IC13 (not usedi Circuits IC19A and IC19B form atwo-bit like the 'high' time, as explained in the pre-
3x6 Port C IC13 (output) shift register that is used to detect exactly one vious paragraphs.
3x7 Control IC13 period during frequency measurements. For the pulse-related measurements a10-
Following areset pulse, both Q outputs are MHz reference frequency is used. This fre-
low. They are also low after two leading quency is supplied by aquartz crystal block,
3x8 Port A IC14 (output) edges of the clock signal. As long as only one OSO. Jumper JP9 allows an optional, exter-
3x9 Port B IC14 (input) output is low (during one period of the clock nal, oscillator to be connected.
3xA Port C IC14 (output) signal), the clock signal is passed to a32-bit A feature of the card that has not been
counter, IC21 (a Type LS7060), via XOR gates discussed so far is its ability to function as an
3xB Control IC14
IC15B-I05c and AND gate IC15D. Note that event counter. In this mode, the input signal
the counter is an LSI chip, not adevice from is connected to the clock input, pin 2, of the
JPI = A: X= 0 the 74LS series. Simultaneously with the en- counter, via 108. The counter will count pul-
abling of the 32-bit counter, the gate LED, D4, ses as long as EC (event count) is active, i.e.,
JP1 = B: X= 1
lights to indicate that a measurement is logic low. This is arranged by the software.
being performed. In contrast to the situation with the other
ses in hexadecimal The measurement is started in arelatively measurement modes, thc event counter
simple manner. First, the 32-bit counter is mode requires the START signal to remain
Table 1. Functions of addresses assigned cleared with the aid of the RCNT signal. The inactive. To complete the story, we must
to the measurement card. START signal goes low, and resets the other mention that the signal I /N determines
registers. Next, START goes high, so that the which pulse edge of the input signal is used
the gate time. This principle is, therefore, not shift register enables the counter during one to advance the counter.
practical for the measurement of very low period. In the centre of the circuit diagram we
frequencies, since these would require gate After one period of the input signal, the find six jumpers labelled JP2 to JP7. These
times of minutes, or even hours, to ensure signal EOC-F is actuated (START =high) via jumpers allow the interrupt signal supplied
the necessary accuracy. Hence, the present bistable IC2oA. Next, the counter can be read by the card to be connected to one of the in-
PC measurement card is based on atotally via IC14 with the aid of signals SCAN and terrupt lines on the PC expansion bus. As
different principle for measuring frequency. LOAD. usual with PC insertion cards, due care must
This principle, which is explained separately A relatively simple arithmetic operation be taken to use afree as well as appropriate
on the previous page, does not have the allows the period to be deduced from the re- interrupt line. In most IBM PCs, the interrupt
above disadvantage of low accuracy at low sults of the frequency measurement. In addi- line assignment is as follows:
frequencies. tion, the pulse on-time can be measured.
As with the voltage meter circuit, amulti- Since it possible to invert the input signal, it IRQ2: reserved
plexer (Ic22) is fitted between the inputs and is arelatively simple matter to measure both IRQ3: COM2: (serial I/0)
the actual measurement circuit. One of these the 'high' time and the 'low' time of the input IRQ4: COM1: (serial I/O)
eight inputs is provided with a protection signal. The circuit based on bistable IC2oB IRQ5: hard disk
circuit, and taken to apin on connector K2. and its associated gates perform this task ele- IRQ6: floppy disk
The remaining seven are connected to K6 gantly. The PC uses the FIT signal to select IRQ7: LPT: (parallel I/0)
only. From the output of the multiplexer, the between frequency measurement and pulse
selected signal is fed to XOR gate IC15A. This time measurement, while the logic level on The measurement card may be set to use
gate may be used to invert the signal under the I /TII line determines whether the IRQ3 without problems if the PC is atype
the control of the I /N line. The output of the measured time corresponds to the 'low' or with only one serial port (COM1 on IRQ4).
the 'high' part of the input pulse. When I /Ñ Where IRQ3 is in use by COM2:, it is nearly
is logic low, IC15A will not invert the input always possible to move the measurement
signal. Consequently, IC19A is reset by the card to IRQ2.
first leading edge after the START com- The IRQ line assigned to the measure-
mand. From that moment on, counter IC21 ment card must be set in hardware as well as
Event count n.a. L n.a.
remains enabled until IC19A is reset by the in software. The software setting is accom-
Pulsetime L H t
in fo next pulse transition, which is trailing. This plished by modifying one line in the configu-
Frequency: resetting takes place via IC2oB. ration file, ADCF.CFG. Further details on the
first go L H fm fo During the measurement, a NOR gate, use of interrupt lines are provided in the
real H H f' m fo IC8B, propagates the measurand to the clock READ.ME file on the diskette.
input of bistable IC2oB, which is thus clocked Finally, jumper JP8 allows us to either
at each trailing edge of the input signal. By combine the interrupts from the frequency
fm = frequency of input signal virtue of IC5B, this clock signal is only effec- meter and the ADC (jumper position F), or
•, Je =frni2 n tive with IC19A set, when alogic one is ap- use them separately (jumper position E). •
to = 10-MHz reference frequency plied to the input of IC2oB. Once IC2oB is set,
IC19A is reset, and the counter disabled. Be-
= not applicable
cause the C2 output is fed back to the data - Next month's second and final instalment of this
input of the bistable (via IC5B), the state of article will deal with the construction and practi-
Table 2. Control signal programming to IC19A and IC21 is frozen until the next start cal use of the measurement card, and with the
select the various functions of the card. pulse occurs. The appearance of the EOC-F control software developed for it.
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 20

MEASUREMENT TECHNIQUES (3)

by F.P. Zantis

Following the discussion in our previous issue on the

measurement of voltage, this month's instalment deals with the
measurement of current and power.

S
TRICTLY speaking, each and every mov- Errors in current measuring printed circuit, may be fairly difficult if not
ing-coil or moving-iron measuring in- impossible.
strument is aammeter. The deflection of the Errors in current measurements occur because On the other hand, adirect measurement
pointer is proportional to the level of the of the frequently not very high accuracy of of current with asimple multimeter may
current flowing through the instrument. the instrument or through the effect the in- solve a seemingly insoluble difficulty in
However, only asmall number of them have strument has on the measurand. As in volt- measuring avoltage. Consider, for instance.
been constructed specially for the measure- age measurements, the internal resistance the circuit in Fig. 16 where, to enable the
ment of current. In most electronic laborato- of the instrument causes ameasuring error. operating point to be set, the drop across the
ria and workshops, multimeters are habitu- To measure acurrent, the circuit through which collecter resistor must be measured. To do
ally used for measuring current. it flows has to be opened to enable the meter this with a20 ki-2/V multimeter, afairly large
The full-scale deflection of the instruments to be inserted in series. That does, of course, measuring error would be caused by the in-
used in multimeters varies roughly from increase the total resistance in the circuit by ternal resistance of the instrument. Here, it
50 µA to 500 µA. Since the levels of the an amount equal to the internal resistance of is far better to measure the current through
currents to be, or being, measured are nor- the measuring instrument. The higher the the resistor as shown, always provided that
mally much higher than those values, the internal resistance, the greater the measur- the internal resistance of the meter is suffi-
metering range must be extended. This is usu- ing error. For instance, if acircuit has are- ciently small. The voltage across the resis-
ally done by shunting the meter with an ap- sistance of 312 and apotential of 12 V is ap- tor is, by Ohm's law, the product of current
propriate resistance through which the larger plied across it, acurrent of I= U /R = 12/3 and resistance.
part of the current flows. When ametering =4A flows. If now ameter with an internal Note that in the previous paragraph it is
range is selected in amultimeter, adifferent resistance of 0.5 Q is inserted into the cir- not possible to measure the base current, since
shunt resistor is switched in parallel with cuit. the current will be 12/(3+0.5) =3.43 A. that is too small to be measured with the
the meter—see Fig. 15. That is ameasuring error of no less than usually available instruments.
Current measurements by digital meters are 17%! The higher the sensitivity of the mea- To estimate the measuring error as pre-
transformed to voltage measurements, for suring instrument, the smaller its internal resis- cisely as possible, it is necessary to know
which shunt resistors are also required. The po- tance and, consequently, the error. the internal resistance of the ammeter at the
tential drop measured across the appropriate selected metering range. Unfortunately, man-
resistor is proportional to the current through ufacturers only specify this for the voltage
Indirect current measurement
it. Here again, the ammetering range is extended ranges. It is, therefore useful to know how
by the use of anumber of resistors. The level of acurrent is determined more to determine it for the current ranges. This
The measurement of alternating currents accurately when the voltage drop it causes may be done by measuring the current from
is subject to errors, tolerances and problems across aresistance is measured. The error that a constant-current source. Then, succes-
that are similar to those experienced in mea- occurred in the example in the previous para- sively connect anumber of resistors of dif-
suring alternating voltages. For instance, the graph then becomes negligibly small. The ferent values in parallel with the meter in-
measurement is true for only one frequency. level of the current through the resistance is puts as shown in Fig. 17. When the meter
Also, the true r.m.s. value is indicated only calculated with the aid of Ohm's law. This indicates half the level of current measured
for atruly sinusoidal current. However, there method of indirectly measuring the current before any resistance was connected in par-
are, fairly expensive, so-called true-r.m.s. is normally far preferable over the direct
multimeters that indicate the r.m.s. value irre- method. Furthermore, it has the advantage
spective of the waveform of the measurand. that the circuit under test need not be bro-
ken into, which, especially in the case of a

Fig. 15. The metering ranges of current meters are Fig. 16. In difficult cases, the direct method of cur-
extended by placing resistors called shunts in par- rent measurement may be used to indirectly mea-
allel with the meter. sure vol-ages to reduce the measurement error. Fig. 17. Multimeter with external shunt resistor.
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS ESA JANUARY 1991
 MEASUREMENT TECHNIQUES (3) 115
allel, the internal resistance of the meter is
equal to the value of the resistor then shunt-
ing the meter inputs.

Extending the metering range

Some multimeters have, in addition to sev-
eral fused current ranges of up to 2A, an un-
protected range of up to 10 A, or even 20 A.
In principle, however, most multimeters may
be used for measuring high currents, but this
entails extending their metering range(s).
The current range(s) of amultimeter may
be extended by the same method as used
above to determine the internal resistance.
If, for instance, aresistor whose value is Fig. 19. Circuit of atypical series regulator in apower supply. The example in
equal to the internal resistance of the instru- the text is the same when an integrated voltage regulator is used.
ment is connected across the input termi-
nals, half of the measurand flows through it: serted into the loop whose current is to be off when it is being prepared for the test. Only
In other words, the indicated value must be measured and the voltage across it mea- when the measuring instrument is secured
multiplied by 2to obtain the true value of sured. The current is then easily calculated to it should the power be switched on. Also,
the current. When two such resistors are with the aid of Ohm's law. For certain val- make sure that no large charging currents
connected across the input terminals, two ues of resistance, the calculation is very sim- (caused by uncharged electrolytic capacitors,
thirds of the measurand flows through them ple. If, for instance, a 142 resistor is used, for instance) can overload the instrument or
and the meter reading must be multiplied by the value of the measured voltage in volts is blow its fuses.
3. With the well-known formula P = 1 2 R, equal to the current in amperes. Also, if a When the approximate value of the mea-
the power dissipated in the shunt resistor(s) 0.142 resistor is used, the indicated value in surand is not known beforehand, the high-
may be calculated. Unfortunately, resistors volts must be multiplied by 10 to give the cur- est metering range of the instrument used
with the required power rating are normally rent in amperes. With this method it is pos- should be selected. The most appropriate rar.ge
available only in the 10% tolerance range, sible to use almost any oscilloscope as an am- may then be selected once the measurement
which does not bode well for accurate mea- meter; even current peaks can be detected— is underway.
surements. A further drawback is that the see Fig. 18.
required resistance values are normally not Even in indirect measuring of current, Measurement of power
available as standard resistors, so that se- the tolerance of the shunt increases the mea-
ries-parallel combinations must be used. An suring error. Special power meters with separate current
aid to calculating the needed resistance val- If the current must be measured without and voltage circuits are hardly ever neces-
ues will be given in the form of asmall basic opening the circuit under test, acurrent probe sary. In most cases, it is perfectly all right to
program later in the series needs to be used. This is placed around the measure current and voltage separately in
wire or cable through which the measurand the circuit under test and then calculate the
flows. Its output is supplied to an ammeter power dissipated.
Current measurement with an or oscilloscope. Such probes are suitable only A typical example is the dissipation in a
oscilloscope for measuring medium to high currents. Probes series regulator—see Fig. 19. In this circuit,
that operate on the transformer principle are aregulated voltage of 6V is obtained from
For measuring large currents, the indirect suitable only for measuring alternating cur- the unregulated potential across C1. The dis-
method is normally much easier to realize. rents, whereas those that use aHall genera- sipation in T2, which is the product of volt-
When the circuit under test has no current- tor may be used for d.c. and a.c. measurement. ane /ice across T2 and output current / a,is con-
carrying resistor across which the voltage that verted into heat.
Of interest is the operating point at which
determines the current can be measured, one Some tips
must be added. For that purpose, any resis- the dissipation in the transistor is amaximum.
tor may be used whose value is small com- Except when current is measured with a That point depends to some extent on the volt-
pared with that of the overall circuit. It is in- probe, the circuit under test should be switched age across C1.The relation between power

Fig. 18. An oscilloscope may be used for indirect

measuring of current. Fig. 20. Curve showing power dissipation vs output current in atypical series regulator.
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
la TEST & MEASUREMENT

dissipation, P„, and output current, l a,is

shown in Fig. 20. Maximum dissipation is

reached when the output current is slightly
larger than half the permissible value of
330 mA. This leads to the conclusion that
U, 1 is load-dependent. When the current
rises, U, 1drops which, since the output volt-
age is constant, causes the potential across
T2 to drop also. This results in areduction
in the power dissipation in the transistor.
The determination of the power in this
example is straightforward since only adi-
rect voltage and adirect current are involved.
The process would have been just as pain-
less if low-frequency sinusoidal quantities
had been involved. It is, for instance, possi-
ble to calculate the input power of the trans-
former in Fig. 19 once the voltage and cur-
rent are known. A word of caution here,
though: since the alternating measurands
are operating with areactance, that is, the
transformer winding, the calculation will
result in the apparent power. This is not of
such practical use as the active (or true) power.
To determine that, the power factor coup
must be known. The true power, P, is then
calculated from

P=UxIx cos0.

The power factor may be determined with Fig. 22. Measurement of phase shift between voltage and current pertaining ,oasoldering iron operated
the aid of adual-trace oscilloscope as shown from the mains via an isolating transformer.
in Fig. 21. One trace shows the voltage and
the other the current. Not the magnitude of Such ascreen is shown in Fig. 22: the cos(/' =cos 36° =0.809.
the two measurands is important, but the two traces pertain to the voltage and current
phase difference between them: this is the dis- of asoldering iron operated from the mains Such measurements on the mains must
tance between the zero crossing of the volt- via an isolating transformer. The value of be made with the aid of an isolating trans-
age and that of the current. Unfortunately, the shunt is 1SI; the error caused by it may former, since otherwise ashort-circuit may
the current in Fig. 21 is measured inverted; be ignored. The phase shift between the two be caused by the earth of the oscilloscope.
this cannot be avoided, however, and must traces is 2scale divisions. Since aperiod of The relation between the input power and
be allowed for in the calculation. A number 360° extends over 20 divisions, the phase output power of atransformer is the efficiency,
of scopes have an invert mode facility, which shift, q), amounts to e. To get acorrect analysis of the behaviour
enables inversion of the trace on the screen. of amains-operated power supply, some ad-
0=(360 /20)x 2=36°, ditional calculations are necessary. These
types of measurement become easier to han-
and the power factor is dle when the subsequent computation is car-
ried out by acomputer and relevant soft-
ware. A suitable table may be designed with
the aid ofa table calculation program. Constants
and formulas may be taken from memory,
so that only the actual measurements need
to be entered. The results, that is, input power,
output power, power dissipation, efficiency,
and so on, then become available in tabular
form, from which relevant curves or bar di-
agrams may be produced alsmost immedi-
ately the measurements have been taken. A
printer may be be found useful to put all the
information to paper.
Power measurements become alittle more
difficult when switching regulators or phase
gating circuits are involved. The waveform
is then not sinuoidal, so that most multime-
ters do not give acorrect result: atrue RMs
meter is then required. The two waveforms
may also be displayed on the screen of a
dual-trace oscilloscope for analysis. For a
worthwhile result, it is best to redraw the
curves on suitable graph paper, as for instance
Fig. 21. Phase shift may be measured with the aid Fig. 23. A dual-trace oscilloscope may also be in Fig. 23, to arrive at apower curve. The
of adual-trace oscilloscope. One signal will be in- used to determine the power when 'voltage and
average value deduced from that curve is
verted since there is only one common earth. current Ere not sinuoidal.
the required power.
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 m
A SIMPLY ELEGANT L-C-R BRIDGE
The balanced bridge described in this article measures capacitance
from 1pF to 10 j.tF, resistance from 1S2 to 10 MS2, and inductance
from 1µH to 100 µH. Ideal for checking the values of non-marked or
otherwise non-identifiable components, the instrument costs next to
nothing, and can be built from parts from the junk-box.

E. Chicken, MBE, MSc, BSc, CEng, FIEE (G3BIK)

T HE first design of the instrument pro- proximately 1µH. That would be the 'un-
posed here was a basic capacitance- known' inductor of low value.
measuring bridge which consisted of Another coil was wound with about ten
nothing more than two capacitors, a10-1d2 times as many turns to produce a higher
carbon linear potentiometer, a crystal ear- value of inductance. The actual value was
piece, and a total of four solder joints, as not important, as will be explained later.
shown in Fig. 1. With the two inductors connected into
the bridge in place of the two capacitors,
again it was possible to obtain asharp audio-
null to indicate balance.
Turning the core in the 111H coil to pro-
duce adifferent value of 'unknown' induct-
ance required the potentiometer to be
re-adjusted to restore balance. This demon-
strated the viability of the simple bridge as a
measuring device suitable for all three types
of passive component, i.e., for inductance
(L), capacitance (C) and resistance (R).

Balanced bridge for L-C-R

measurement

An alternating voltage at audio fre- Consider first the simple resistive potential
quency was required to feed the bridge, and divider shown in Fig. 2a. The potential dif-
a quick glance around the author's radio ference, or voltage drop, across Rais
shack showed anumber of possible sources,
e.g., an oscilloscope which offered a1-kHz Ra
Us
square-wave signal at 1Vpp on its front panel Ra+Rb
for self-calibration, an RF signal generator
which offered a 1-kHz sine-wave at a few where Us is the supply voltage. Now con- values. But, if the voltage drop across Ra is
volts rms, ahome-made AF oscillator with a sider the other resistive potential divider in equal to that across Ra, the potential dif-
2-V output, and, if the worst came to the Fig. 2b, which incorporates unspecified but ference will be nought, and the voltage indi-
worst, the audio output from the transistor different values of resistor from those in cator will read zero or avoltage 'null'. The
broadcast radio tuned to the pop-music Fig. 2a. The potential difference, or voltage electrical bridge formed by the two potential
channel! drop, across Reis divider networks Ra-Rb and Re-Rd is then
All were tried and found to provide a said to be balanced, and that will also be so
fully audible signal in the crystal earpiece, Re irrespective of whether d.c. or a.c. is used for
Us
and rotation of the balance potentiometer Re+Rd the voltage supply. The mathematical equa-
spindle yielded a clearly discernible and tion for such anull condition is given by
sharp null, more than adequate to afford re-
peatable accuracy of measurement. Ra Re
Us — Us
The capacitors were replaced with resis- Connecting the two potential divider net- Ra+Rb Re+Rd
tors, with equally promising results for the works in parallel to form a basic resistive
measurement of resistance. bridge, and feeding them both from the com- which simplifies to
But what of inductance in the RF range? mon voltage supply, as shown in Fig. 2c,
A few turns of enamelled copper wire were does not alter the two equations given for the Ra R,
wound on to an available 7-mm former with potential differences across Raand Re. TI, ' Rd
an iron-dust slug core. A 100-pF capacitor If, however, the voltage drop across Ra is
was soldered across the coil. Its resonant fre- different from that across Re,then avoltage
quency was adjusted to about 15 MHz with detector connected between junction Ra-Rb
the aid of agate dip oscillator. Next, the in- and junction Re-R d will indicate the dif- If the value of Rb is known and fixed, and if
ductance of the coil was calculated to be ap- ference between the two voltage-drop the ratio Re/R d is known, it is possible under
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 24
TEST AND MEASUREMENT

this null condition (i.e., when the bridge is at sistors, and the switch escutcheon is marked
balance) to determine the actual value of an with their values. An example: if anull oc-
unknown resistor R. from curs at, say, x0.05 on the 1,000 L range, the
unknown resistor has a value of (1,000 x
0.05) =50 a
Ra =Rb —
Rd = (known Rb) x(ratio Rd Rd)

Inductance measurement
For example, if Rcis made equal to Rd,their
ratio is 1.0, and the null condition becomes The above principle of measurement can
Ra=Rb, irrespective of the actual values of Rc also be applied to inductance, with resistors
and Rd. Only their ratio is of importance. Raand Rb replaced by inductors Laand Lb. To
Further, if the ratio Re/Rd is made ad- be effective, the bridge must be fed with an
justable and calibrated, and if the value of a.c. voltage at afrequency, f, high enough to
the known resistor Rb is made to be switch- produce inductive reactances X. and Xc re-
selectable, the unknown resistor, R., can be spectively, sufficient to provide potential
quantified over awide range of values. differences suitable for null detection.
The simplified potential difference equa-
tions at null condition are:
Scale design: the basics
For convenience, Rc and Rd can be replaced Rc
X.= Ab
by alinear-law rotary potentiometer of any Ad
convenient resistive value, to be provided
with acircular scale and apointer knob. The where X for inductive reactance is
scale is then calibrated to read the ratio of re-
sistive values measured between the centre X =2it fL
tag and the two outer tags of the poten-
tiometer, for different angles of spindle-rota- So, this equation simplifies to:
tion.
At mid-travel, for example, the resistance
measurements between the centre tag and La =Lb
the two outer tags would be equal in an ideal
linear-law potentiometer. At three-quarters which conveniently uses the same ratio
traverse, the resistance of one section would multiplier Re/Rd as for resistance measure-
be some three times that of the other section, ment, hence the same ratio scale can serve for
giving aratio of 3:1 and vice-versa. both resistance and inductance.
In other words, as the spindle is rotated
away from mid-position in one direction, the
ratio will increase from 1.0 upwards towards
Capacitance measurement
infinity, and in the other direction it will de- For the measurement of capacitance with in-
crease from 1.0 towards zero. ductors La and Lb replaced by capacitors Ca
Although the rotational movement of a and Ci,, again the voltage supply must be a.c.
standard linear-law carbon potentiometer is to provide, in this case, capacitive reactances
restricted to about 300 degrees of travel, for- Xaand Xb.
tuitously and very conveniently the ratios The simplified equation for potential dif-
x10 and x0.1 fall at approximately 90 de- ference in the null condition is
grees on either side of mid-travel. So, if mid-
travel is positioned at the top of the scale, i.e., Xa
at 360 degrees, then the dial can be marked Xb =Rd
x0.1, x1.0, and x10 at 270,360 and 90 degrees
respectively, and x0.01 and x100 at 240 and where X for capacitive reactance is
120 degrees respectively; to afirst approxi-
mation. 1
The value of a resistor is thus readily X— 271f C
determined by rotating the potentiometer
until anull is detected. The ratio indicated on
R,
the scale is subsequently multiplied by the Xa =Ab
Ad
value of the known resistor, Rb. Mathemati-
cally,
which simplifies to

R.= Rb x ratio Re/Rd at null

Ca =Lb

By assigning aselection of different values Note that in this expression the ratio multi-
for the known resistor Rb, the range of meas- plier, Rd /R c,is inverted with respect to the
urement for the unknown resistor, Ra,can be one used for the resistance and inductance becomes
conveniently modified. To simplify meas- measurements. In practice, this means that a
urement even further, it is preferable to use mirror-image of the ratio scale is required for 100.0 10.0 1.0 0.1 0.01, etc.
whole number values for the known resistors, the measurement of capacitance. So, the
e.g., 100 L, 10 k.Q, 100 kg etc. These known scale Again, aselection of range capacitor values
resistors, which for convenience can be for Cb will provide the desired range of
range-selectable, are then renamed range re- 0.01 0.1 1.0 10.0 100.0 measurement, and for user convenience,
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 A SIMPLY ELEGANT L-C-R BRIDGE

COMPONENTS LIST

Resistors:
2 100Q 1% metal film rrange switch,
1for calibration
2 lk.C21% metal film 1for range switch,
1for calibration
2 101(Q 1%, metal film 1for range switch,
1for calibration
2 100kí 1%, metal film lfor range switch,
1for calibration
2 221(Q R1;R2
1 21(Q7 R3
1 R4
1 100Q R5
1 100 linear potentiometer P1

Capacitors:
2 100pF 1% silvereci 1for range switch,
mica 1for calibration
2 1nF 1% silvered 1for range switch,
mica 1for calibration
2 1OnF 1% polystyrene 1for range switch,
1for calibration
2 100nF 5% polyester 1for range switch,
1for calibration
2 1OnF ceramic Cl;C2
1 100nF ceramic C3

Inductors:
1 10µ1-I encapsulated polypropylene
1 10e air-cored, self-wound (see text)
Semiconductors:
1 555 Cl
1 BC107 Ti

Miscellaneous:
Fig. 4. Circuit diagram of the L-C-R meter. 1 enclosure, ABS plastic.
120x65x40 mm, with lid
they should be round numbers, e.g., 100 pF, moulded RF inductor of 10% tolerance. 1 1-pole, 12-way rctary midget wafer
It was considered that a single 10-01 switch, plastic spindle,bush
0.1 le, etc.
range inductance would provide a wide 1 miniature on/off switch

enough range of inductance measurement 1 3.5-mm panel mounting jack socket

Circuit design concept for normal RF purposes, but provision has 1 crystal eau-piece

been made for extending the measuring 1 DIL socked 8-way

The circuit diagram of the L-C-R bridge is
range for each type of component. This can 1 35-mm square section of 0.1-inch
given in Fig. 4. A rectangular wave of about
hole-spacing copper-strip board
9Vpp is provided by a555, ICi, configured as be provided permanently by wiring an addi-
2 4-mm terminal post, red
an astable multivibrator, with a repetition tional Lb, Cb, or Rb on to the range switch, or
2 4-mm terminal post, back
frequency of about 2kHz. temporarily by connecting an appropriate
1 PP3 battery with twin press stud
The 2-kHz output from the astable is buf- component across the MATCH terminals with
fered by an emitter follower transistor, Ti, to the RANGE switch in the 'match' position.
minimize loading of the 555 output circuit by The MATCH terminals serve also to allow
the bridge when this is switched to the lower value matching of apair of external compo- plastic container with removable flat cover.
resistance/reactance ranges. nents. When the two are exactly equal in Externally accessible components, i.e., bal-
A crystal earpiece is used for the null de- value, the null falls exactly at the '1.0' posi- ance potentiometer, range switch, MATCH
tector. Its high impedance offers a better tion on the ratio scale, and when not and MEASURE terminals, ear-piece socket and
audible signal than would an electromag- matched, the scale indicates the relative battery switch, are mounted on to the remov-
netic version to help with the determination value of the component connected to the able panel.
of the null, particularly when measuring in- MEASURE terminals compared to that at the One lead of each of the 'range' compo-
ductance. MATCH terminals. nents is soldered directly to the appropriate
Accuracy of measurement depends Although no d.c. polarizing voltage has lag-terminal of the RANGE switch, and the
mainly on the accuracy of the component been included for electrolytic or tantalum ca- other lead of each component is soldered to
values switched into the circuit by the L-C-R pacitors, the bridge can be used for the meas- aself-supporting ring of tinned copper wire.
range switch, Si, and on the quality of the li- urement of such capacitors, without The RANGE switch is asingle-pole 12-po-
near-law potentiometer, Pi, used for the bal- problems. sition rotary midget wafer type, with aplas-
ance control. Current drain from the 9-V PP3 battery is tic spindle and fixing bush, to minimize
The prototype of the L-C-R bridge was only about 7mA. stray capacitance which might adversely af-
built with a standard off-the-shelf linear fect the measurement at the lower picofarad
carbon potentiometer for the balance control range. A flat on the spindle allows apush-on
Construction knob to be used, of the type which has amo-
(a 1,000-S2 version should serve equally
well), low-tolerance, high-stability resistors Because electrical shielding is not required, veable cover-cap to allow alignment of the
and capacitors, and acommercially available the components are housed in a low-cost pointer.
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 26
TEST AND MEASUREMENT

The drawing in Fig. 6shows asuitable es-

cutcheon for the L-c-R SELECT/RANGE switch.
The linear-law carbon potentiometer
used for the balance control also has aplastic
spindle and fixing bush, but preferably with-
out a flat on the spindle, to allow a grub-
screw type of pointer knob to be aligned to
the '1.0' mark on the ratio-scale.
The 555 integrated circuit, transistor
and the eight associated passive components
are assembled on to a35-mm square piece of
0.1-inch hole-spacing copper strip board. It is
reasonable to use an 8-way OIL socket for the
555. The actual lay-out of the few compo-
nents on the board is uncritical, hence does
not warrant aguidance sketch. The finished
2-kHz oscillator board is small enough to be
self-suspended by its connecting wires, but
its PP3 battery may need an elementary fix-
ing bracket or zip-strap.
Four 4-mm terminal posts for the
MEASURE and MATCH pairs of terminals allow
the components to be either loosely plugged
in, or more securely screw-fastened to suit
the circumstance.
The size of the enclosure is not critical, in-
deed the prototype used a plastic box of
about the same general shape and size as a
standard wall-socket box of 75x75x45 mm,
but abox with apanel of, say, 65x120 mm
would accommodate acircular scale of read-
able dimension plus the range switch escut- Fig. 5. Scale design for the balance control.
cheon, with room to spare for the terminals,
battery switch, and ear-piece socket. care not to move the spindle. Tighten the (i.e., 10 kû x0.01 =100 û).
grub-screw, and rotate the knob to either Replace the 100 LI resistor by the 1,000 Q
side of '1.0' to check that the null is still coin- resistor and, with the RANGE switch set to
Calibration
cident with the '1.0' mark. 1,000 Q, check that the null is at '1.0' (360 de-
The ratio scale needs to be calibrated for op- Select the 1,000 Q range and, with the greeS).
timum results, because the linear-resistance 100 Q resister still connected, adjust the Switch to the 100 Q range, still with the
characteristic of the chosen balance poten- pointer for null in the ear-piece. This should 1,000 Q resistor, when the null should occur
tiometer may not necessarily be the same as occur at about 270 degrees. Mark the R/L at about 90 degrees. Mark the R/L scale 'x10'
that used in the author's prototype. The scale 'x0.1' at that position (i.e., 1,000 SI x0.1 at that position (i.e., 100 Q x10 =1,000 a).
sample scale shown in Fig. 5may be used for =100 û). Replace the 1,000 LI resistor by the 100 kf.
2
guidance. Switch to the 10 ka range, when the null resistor, set the range switch to 1,000 1 2, and
-
Although the standard potentiometer has should appear at about 240 degrees, and the null should occur at about 120 degrees,
arotational travel of about 300 degrees, it is mark the R/L scale 'x0.01' at that position and mark the R/L scale 'x100' at that posi-
recommended that the usable ratio scale be
confined to ±90 degrees about centre (ratios:
x0.1, x1.0, x10), or at most ±120 degrees (ra-
tios x0.01, x1.0, x100).
The easiest way to calibrate the scale is to
remove the pointer knob and temporarily
affix acircular paper-scale centrally over the
fixing bush, with the '1.0' mark uppermost at
360 degrees.
The circular scale should have two circu-
lar bands, one marked 'R/L' for resistance
and inductance, and the other marked 'C' for
capacitance.
Plug in the ear-piece, select the 100 Q
range, and switch on the oscillator. The parts
list recommends the availability of four du-
plicate low-tolerance high-stability resistors.
These will be used as the external standards
for calibration/test of the scale.
Connect the 100 Q resistor to the MEASURE
terminals, and carefully rotate the balance
pot spindle until anull is obtained in the ear-
piece. Loosen the grub-screw in the pointer-
knob, and carefully position the knob on to
the spindle with its pointer exactly at '1.0'
(360 degrees) position of the scale, taking Fig. 6. Range switch escutcheon.

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 A SIMPLY ELEGANT L-C-R BRIDGE IM
R/L marking C marking'
0.1 10
0.2 5.0
0.3 3.3
0.4 2.5
0.5 2.0
0.6 1.7
0.7 1.4
0.8 1.3
0.9 1.1
1.0 1.0
0.01 100
0.02 50
20 0.05
80 0.013

urements of capacitance, provided that the

capacitors being measured are of good elec-
trical quality. However, regarding the meas-
urement of inductance, it must be borne in
mind that the balance equations have been
simplified by assuming zero resistance in the
small values of inductance to be measured.
In practice, this will not be the case, de-
pending on the construction of the particular
RF coil. For example, the moulded 10 µH in-
ductor used in the prototype has aseries re-
sistance of about 0.3 Q owing to the very thin
wire used for the coil, and whilst this does
not unduly detract from the calibration accu-
racy when measuring inductors wound with
similarly thin wire gauges, it does create in-
accuracies when trying to measure the
values of coils with heavier gauge wires, e.g.,
14 to 24 SWG (14 to 25 AWG).
The solution to the measurement of in-
ductance of heavier gauge coils is neverthe-
less quite simple, by using the MATCH
terminals with an alternative 'standard'
10 µH inductor connected across them, but
Fig. 7. Suggested front panel layout of the L-C-R bridge. wound from thickish wire. A suitable alter-
native 10 µH air-cored coil can be con-
tion (i.e., 1,000 û x100 =100 Id». nected to its centre tag, and another to one of structed easily by close-winding 24 turns of
It will now be obvious that the ratios x0.1 its outer tags, and to set it to aselection of 20 SWG (1.0 mm dia., or 21 AWG) ena-
to x1.0 and x1.0 to xl 0each span about 90 de- values by means of an ohm-meter, i.e., 200, melled copper wire with awinding-span of
grees of travel, whereas the ratios x0.01 to 300, 400 ... 900 sa, etc. These values are then about 24 mm on to aPVC former of 25 mm
x0.1, and x10 to x100, each span only about used to establish the intermediate scale outside diameter; or 32-turns of 20 SWG
30 degrees of travel. This means that calibra- points, i.e., x0.02, x0.03, x0.04 ... x0.09 using wire by 32 mm span on to a20 mm outside
tion points beyond less than x0.1, and the 10 ki2 range; x0.2, x0.3, x0.4 ... x0.9 on o.d. PVC former; or 69 turns by 69 mm span
greater than x10, become increasingly the 1,000 Q range; and x2, x3, x4 ... x9 using of 20 SWG wire on to a12.5 mm former. In
cramped - but still very repeatable and ac- the 100 1 2range.
- each case, allow 10 mm end-tails.
ceptably accurate provided that care is taken Similarly with values between 20 ki2 and Measurement of thicker-wire unknown
with the calibration of the intermediate 90 kn on a 100 kf2 potentiometer, to give inductance now follows normal procedure,
points in each sector. scale points of x20, x30, x40 ... x90 using the but with the switch set at its 'match' position
Nulls are still very detectable even fur- 1,000 Q range. instead of the 'L' position, and with the
ther towards the end-stops of travel, but the The resistance calibration scale applies 10 µH thick-wire standard inductor con-
cramping is even more pronounced. That is equally to the measurement of inductance, nected to the MATCH terminals.
where the advantage of a large diameter but amirror-image scale is required for capa- To get the feel of the bridge, try measur-
scale becomes apparent. The majority of in citance measurement. The same calibration ing aselection of L, Cand Rcomponents, and
vivo measurements will however fall within positions pertain, but the C scale must be the effect of tolerance on nominal values.
the ±90 degree bands, where the scale is un- marked with the inverse values from the Then try matching component values by
cramped and clearly readable. R/L scale points, rounded up for practical connecting pairs of nominally equal values
To calibrate the intermediate scale- purposes, i.e., as shown in the table. Calibra- to the MATCH and MEASURE terminals until
points, it is advisable to restrict them to the tion is now complete, and the bridge is ready null is obtained at '1.0' on the scale. Try also
120 degree sectors on either side of '1.0', and for use. extending/modifying the range of measure-
to use whole numbers for the external cali- ment by connecting aknown value compo-
bration resistors rather than the decimal nent to the external MATCH terminals. And
Does it work?
values of the 'preferred' series. The easiest for interest only, try measuring the relative
way to do this is to use a1,000 SI standard li- Yes. Results when measuring resistance can effect of an iron-dust slug versus abrass slug
near-law potentiometer with a wire con- be accepted with confidence, as can mea - in alow-value RF inductance.
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 28

PC-CONTROLLED VIDEOTEXT
DECODER PC-VT7000

PART 2: I
2C INTERFACE AND CONSTRUCTION OF THE UNIT

This second and concluding part of the article deals with the
operation of the I
2C PC insertion card that forms the link between

the computer and the main decoder. As usual, we close off the
article with full constructional details of the project.

T
HE term I2C refers to acontrol and data
bus system developed by Philips Com-
ponents for use on ICs in consumer electro- SCL
nics equipment (Ref. 2). The I 2C system is data bus tri -state
used here to control the SDA5243 ECCT on bus bus driver S3A
VI
driver eiv
the main decoder board (see Part 1of this ar-
ticle). A special PC insertion card has been
developed to ensure the fastest possible two- control bus 8-Bit-
videotext decoder

VI
way communication between the ECCT and control logic 0-Latch
N.
the PC, with the aid of the I2C bus.
à
The block diagram of the I 2C bus control-
ler card is shown in Fig. 6. At the side of the address bus I/0
PC extension slot, an address comparator address address
VI comparator setting
compares the I/O addresses supplied by the
PC with a user-defined address. If the ad-
dresses match, the comparator supplies an
appropriate enable signal to a'control logic' supply voltage

block, which, in turn, switches on two data-

909517-11-12
bus buffers and an 8-bit D-latch. When the
card is written to with an appropriate I/O
address, data on the PC databus is copied to Fig. 6. Block diagram of the 12C card. This forms an interface between the PC and the main

an 8-bit D-latch. The open-collector drivers decoder, which is a separate unit in this project.

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 29
PC-CONTROLLED VIDEOTEXT DECODER PC-VT7000

37
IC3 IC6/C
Ls 49
ADO 19
DIP
Ls 48
4101
IC1 4LS136

LS 47
602
2 18
-
3
4 ID 10 0601 2106 /D
Ls 46
1103
4
5
2
A3 83
E1
1 7 2D
e 40
30
20
30
40
6
9 13
Ls 45
604
6
84
E15
3
13
11
50 50
12
15 uL—
60 60 GNo 74LSI36
Ls A4
605 46 86
137
2
70 70
6
1 ea 80
Ls 43
1
106
7 A8 BEI
741_6245 7ALS374

Ls 42
607

IC2 /A
D741.S32
sa- WA
IC4
Ls 814
3 1-1
-
—
G
LS 813
IOW
18
Y1 AI BU 1
IC2 /B
D
16
02 42
03 43
04 44
5
5 74LS32 IC4 6
19

11 9
YI Al
13 20
02 42
+5V 2
03 43
22
YA 44
23
ÍTTIMTir—C) 74LS244
2
66666 66 66 25

LS A31
AO
•c•i 2 e
Al IC5
LS 430

LS 429
A2 7;4 PO ffl pit
3 .10 880
PI 01 0 AI 881
A3
LS R28 P2 02 042
043
131,
893
12
P3 03
A4 13
LS *27 6
P4 04 44 894
+12V
45 P5 05 2 045 885
LS B9
LS A26 P6 06 046
0 47
896
8217 C2 ±
P7 07
LS A25 o AB BAB
49 8219
A7 74LS688
LS A24 12V

AEN GAO LS 87

LS 411 C3
IC6/A 16V
LS A22
3
5V
74LS32
LS A23 +5V
\LS 5
74LS136
C2 +5V C4 16V
IC2 /D
IC6 /B 12 C6. 1
. C7 .I
. C8 .1
. c9j C1 C1.1. LS 81 1-10u
+5V

6 13
LS Eno LS gg
.710070:F 007 007100710On
4
7ALS32
LS 831 LS 829
C5: ,
iC lu
v
74L 136
min
Gm) C6...C11 = cer. GNO

909517-11-14

Fig. 7. Circuit diagram of the I

2C card. Basically an I/O mapped PC interface, the circuit provides the bidirectional SCL and SDA lines.

at the outputs of the D-latch provide the tor when the card is addressed by the PC. fed back to the inputs of the IC via buffer IC4.
transmit function of the insertion card for The address of the card in the PC's I/O This allows the card to be detected by the
two I 2C lines, SCL (serial clock) and SDA map is defined by wire jumpers BRo to BR9. control software, and an error message to be
(serial data). Since these lines are bidirec- A '0' is set for aparticular address bit by fit- generated when it is not fitted or not found
tional, provision is also made to convey in- ting the associated wire. The address com- at the requested address.
formation from the videotext decoder to the parator, IC5-IC6A, is not enabled until PC bus Outputs 3Q and 4Q of IC3, and inputs A2
I2C card. A 3-state busdriver is enabled when line AEN is logic high, while at the same time and A3 of IC4, are taken to a25-way D-con-
the PC reads from the card address. The SCL either IORD or IOWR is logic low. If this con- nector, 131.h, for future extensions. The 25-
and SDA information captured by the 3-state dition is satisfied, and if the card is ad- way connector also serves to connect the
busdriver is fed to the PC via the databus dressed by the PC, the output of ICs, pin 19, approximately 2-m-long cable to the video-
buffer. changes from high to low, thus enabling the text decoder. Apart from data and com-
rest of the circuit via IC2A-IC2o. mands, this cable also carries the +12 V,
The logic level on the IORD and IOWR —12 V, —5 V and +5 V supply voltages, and a
Circuit description of the lines determines whether the PC writes to 8- common ground line, from the PC to the
12 C card bit D-latch IC3 (a 74LS374), or reads from 3- decoder board.
state bus driver IC4 (a 74LS244).
Figure 7shows the detailed circuit diagram Outputs 1Q and 2Q of latch IC3 are con-
Construction
of the PC-compatible I 2C interface card. The nected to the inputs of XOR gates IC6c and
bidirectional databus buffer is formed by IC6D. These LS-TTL gates have open-collec- Briefly recapitulating, the PC-VT7000 con-
ICi, a 74LS245. The data direction is tor outputs, and function as drivers for the sists of two units: the main decoder, which is
switched under the control of PC bus line I2C lines, SCL and SDA. They have no logic housed in ablack, 7000-series ABS enclosure,
IORD (pin B14), which is also connected to function, and are equivalent to the two tran- and the I 2C card, which is inserted into afree

IC2A. The second PC control line, IOWR sistors shown in Fig. 6. SCL and SDA infor- extension slot in your PC. These two units
(pin 13) is connected to another gate, IC2o. mation received from the videotext decoder are linked by acable.
The two OR gates IC2A and IC2o form the reaches the I 2C card via inputs Al and A4 of

'control logic' block shown in Fig. 6. Their 3-state bus driver IC4. Decoder board
function is enabled by the address compara- The signals on outputs 5Q to 8Q of IC3 are The construction is best started by fitting all
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 30
RADIO AND TELEVISION

35 wire links on the main decoder board

(Fig. 8). Next, fit the low-profile components,
followed by the higher parts. Note that the
two slide switches at the rear edge of the
PCB, between the two SCART sockets, must
be fitted horizontally. Insert and solder six
solder pins into the respective holes on the
PCB, and use these to secure the terminals of
the slide switches. The front sides of the swit-
ches must align with the PCB edge, i.e., the
plastic part to operate the switch must pro-
trude from the rear panel of the enclosure.
The two SCART sockets are mounted by
gently pushing their plastic side locks into
the holes provided in the PCB. Next, the
21 pins of each socket are soldered at the
track side. For additional support, the
SCART sockets are screwed to the rear panel
of the enclosure.
The PC insertion card is connected to the
decoder by a2-m-long 25-way flatcable. At
the side of the decoder, this cable is con-
nected to a26-way header, STL1 (of which
one pin is not used). The short pins of this
header are inserted into the PCB holes and
subsequently soldered. The cable between
the decoder and the I 2C card has a26-way

¡DC socket at one end, and a25-way male

sub-D plug at the other end. The 26-way IDC
connector is plugged on to header STL1 on
the decoder board.
Pin header STL2 is inserted and soldered
like STU. ST1.2 provides a number of im-
portant signals in the system, and is in-
tended for measurements and extensions.
Similarly, the eight solder pins near SCART
socket 131.12 are intended for (optional) use of
the stereo sound inputs and outputs.
As will be recalled from the circuit de-
scriptions, the PC-VT7000 is powered from
the computer. All the necessary supply volt-
ages are carried via the I2Ccard and the cable
between this and the decoder.

I2C bus controller card

The lay-out of this double-sided, through-

plated board is shown in Fig. 9. The board
has pre-tinned contacts for insertion into a
PC extension slot.
First, fit the ten wire links, AO through
A9. Leave alittle room between these wires
and the PCB surface, so that they can be cut
later to set the card address. Next, fit the re-
sistors, the capacitors (four electrolytic, and
six ceramic types), and then the six ICs.
Align the angled terminals of the 25-way
female sub-D connector with the relevant
holes in the PCB, and solder them carefully
at the track side, taking care to avoid short-
ing adjacent pins by applying too much
solder tin. Next, fit the support bracket sup-
plied with the kit. Place it over the D-connec-
tor, and secure it with two M3 screws and
nuts. In the PC, remove the rear panel
bracket at the location of the slot that you in-
tend to use for the I 2C card.
Before fitting the card into the PC, set its
address by opening wire jumpers BRO—BR9 EVA aoseol
as required. Details on the hardware address
selection are provided by the READ.ME file
on the diskette supplied with the kit. Ready-
assembled and aligned I 2C boards supplied
Fig. 8a. Track layout of the single-sided decoder board.

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 PC-CONTROLLED VIDEOTEXT DECODER PC-VT7000 II
COMPONENTS LIST

DECODER BOARD

Resistors:
6 75Q R1—R6
2 100Q R41;FI42
6 220Q R7—R10;R34;R37
1 270Q R26
2 330Q R25;R32
1 470Q R30
3 820Q R12;R14;R16
3 lk.Q R24;R28;R29
1 1k112 R21
4 1k125 R11;R13;R15;R35
2 2kf22 R17;R31
1 3k123 R23
1 4k.Q7 R20
2 101(Q R38;R40
1 121(Q R19
1 68kí R22
2 100k.Q R33;P39
1 100Q preset V R36
1 100Q preset V R27

Capacitors:
2 15pF C19;C25
1 18pF C13
1 47pF C15
1 100pF C24
1 220pF C8
1 270pF C23
1 470pF C21
1 1nF C20
1 1OnF C18
1 22nF C22
2 47nF C10;C12
1 68nF C7
6 100nF ceeamic C1—C4;C16;C27
1 220nF C9
1 1µF 16V C11
1 2p.F2 16V C6
5 10µF 254 C17;C26;C30—C32
1 221.1F 16V C5
3 10011F 16V C28;C29;C37
1 40pF trimmer C14

•Semiconductors:
1 SDA5231 ICl
1 SDA5243 IC2
1 6264 RAM IC3
1 CD4052 IC5
I
- 1 CD4053 IC4
6 BC548 T1—T6
4 1N4148 D1-04

Miscellaneous:
1 6MHz quartz crystal Q1
1 13.875 MHz quartz crystal 02
1 10µH inductor Ll
2 SPOT slide switch Si ;S2
2 PCB-mount SCART socket 13111;B112
2 26-way pin headers
14 solder pin, 1.3 mm dia.
1 printed-circuit board
1 enclosure type 7000
73 cm silver-plated wire
1 Flatcable, length 2 m, 25-way, ready-as-
sembled with D-connectcr and IDC connec-
tor

Fig. 8b. Component mounting plan of the decoder board.

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 RADIO AND TELEVISION

COMPONENTS LIST

I
2C PC INSERTION CARD

Resistors:
2 1k.f2 R11;R12
10 101(Q R1-R10

Capacitors:
6 100nF ceramic C6-C11
4 10p.F 16V C2-05

Semiconductors:
1 74LS32 IC2
1 74LS136 IC6
1 74LS244 IC4
1 74LS245 ICl
1 74LS374 IC3
1 74LS688 IC5

Miscellaneous:
1 25-way PCB-mount D-connector BLJ1
1 PC card support bracket
2 M3x6 mm screw
2 M3 nut
12 cm silver-pated wirs
1 Guit

by ELV are set to operate at address 300H.

Alignment
The decoder needs to be adjusted before it is
fitted into the enclosure. Although arelative-
ly complex circuit, the decoder is remarkably
simple to align.
Start by connecting aTV set to SCART
socket Bill. During the alignment, the TV set
has the double function of a CVBS signal
source, and adisplay for the Teletext pages.
Run the program on the PC, and call up a
Teletext page, say, number 100. If the
decoder is correctly aligned, the page will
appear on the TV. Without adjustment, hi5w-
ever, the TV picture is probably unsteady —
the picture may move horizontally, or may
be corrupted by diagonally moving lines.
Carefully adjust trimmer 04 until the pic-
ture synchronizes correctly.
Inductor Li in the data-clock filter comes
pre-aligned with the kit, and must not be ad-
justed.
Proceed with the adjustment by setting
the clamping level for the Teletext subtitling
with the aid of preset R36. The following ad-
justment procedure is required only if Tele-
text subtitles are to be recorded on aVCR.
Connect a VCR to SCART socket BU2,
and switch it to stand-by. The video signal
fed to pin 19 of BU2 is taken from pin 20 and
routed to pin 19 of 131.h (TV). To prevent the
TV switching to RGB input mode, tempo-
rarily connect pin 16 of BLit to ground. ,
Use the control software to select the
superimpose mode. Next, adjust preset R36
until the characters appear clearly in theyic-
ture, i.e., with the best possible contrast ratio,,
and without distortion or excessive bright-
ness. Although this adjustment is perfectly
feasible simply by looking at the TV picture,
Fig. 9. Double-sided printed circuit board for the I
2C interface card. it may also be carried out with the aid of an
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 PC-CONTROLLED VIDEOTEXT DECODER PC-VT7000

A compfete kit of parts or e Tdeo-

text decoder is available from the de-
signers' exclusive worldwide
distributors:

ELV France
B.P. 40
F-57480 Sierck-les-Bains
FRANCE

Telephone: +33 82837213

Facsimile: :F33 828381, 0

Carefully lift the bottom enclosure half,

and place two pencils or afolded handker-
chief underneath it, so that the heads of the
four screws rest on the desk while the enclo-
sure half is alittle higher. Carefully place the
top enclosure half on to the lower half (the
ventilation slots are at the rear side), and
FiLV
V/CbeePherh
temporarily insert four screws into the holes.
The ends of these screws partly enter the
Owe eselow

PCB spacers, and serve to keep these aligned

7000 I

(centred) with the holes in the top half of the

Fig. 10. Opened prototype of the decoder, and the associated I
2C card. enclosure. Now carefully lower the top half.
Draw one corner of the enclosure over the
oscilloscope. Connect the scope to the collec- PCB into the lower half of the enclosure sup- edge of the desk, capture the screw at the
tor of T5, and adjust R36 until the black level plied with the kit. The ventilation slots are at underside, and push it upwards so that it
of the superimpose signal matches that of the the front side. Remove the four square blocks ejects the screw at the top. Fit an M4 nut, and
background video signal. This completes the from the underside of the bottom half of the secure the screw from the underside. The
adjustment of the PC-VT7000. enclosure, and insert four M4x70 mm screws other three screws are fitted likewise. Fi-
into the holes. At the inside of the enclosure, nally, push-fit the four blocks at the under-
place two 1.5x10 mm dia. plastic washers side, the rubber feet, and the four square
Final assembly over each screw at the front side, and one covers at the top side of the enclosure. •
If this has not already been done, mount the washer over each screw at the rear side.
rear panel to the decoder board, so that the The decoder board is fitted by passing the References:
SCART sockets and the plastic pins of the two screws at the rear of the enclosure 1. "Video line selector", Elektor Electronics
two slide switches protrude from it. The flat- through the two holes in the PCB. At the April 1990.
cable is inserted via the slot provided at the same time, fit the rear panel. Next, place the 2. "Inter-IC communications", Elektor Electro-
right-hand side of the rear panel. four 60-mm-long plastic PCB spacers over nics September 1990.
Fit the completed and adjusted decoder the screw ends, and mount the front panel.

R1 Mode
Appendix: SAA5243 ECCT register functions Interlace/non-interlace
TO, Ti
312/313 line control.
TCS ON Text composite sync or
07 06 05 04 03 D2 D1 DO
direct sync select.
DEW/FULL FIELD Field flyback or full channel
TA 7a. P/ ACO. GHOST DEW/ TCS Ti TO
R1 Mode mode.
8BIT ON/OFF ROW FULL ON
7+P/8-BIT 7bits with parity checking
ENABLE FIELD
or 8-bit mode.
- BANK ACQ. ACQ. TB START START START ) TA, TB Test bits; 0for normal
Pag e request
req
SELECT CCT CCT COLUMN COLUMN COLUMN R2 operation.
address
A2 Al AO SC2 SC1 SCO R2 page request address
) START COLUMN Start
request.
column for page
- - - PRO4 PRD3 PRD2 PRD 1 PRDO R3 Page request data

- A2 Al AO ) R4 Display chapter ACQ CCT Selects one of 4acquisition

- - -
circuits.
BKGND BKGND COR COR TEXT TEXT PON PON Display control BANK SELECT Selects bank of 4 pages
R5
OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN (normal) addressed for acquisition.
) R4 Display chapter Determines which of 8
BKGND BKGND COR COR TEXT TEXT PON PON Display control
R6
OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN Inewsflash/subtitle) pages
For normal
is displayed.
and newsflash/
R5, R6 Di splay control
) subtitle.
STATUS CURSOR CONCEAL/ TOP/ SINGLE/ BOX ON BOX ON BOX ON
REVEAL BOTTOM DOUBLE 24 1-23 0 R7 Display mode PON Picture on.
ROW ON
BTM/TOP HEIGHT TEXT Text on.
COR Contrast reduction on.
_ - - CLEAR A2 Al AO Active chapter BKGND Background colour on.
R8
MEM. R7 Display mode
) BOX ON 0 (1-23,24 Boxing function allowed on
_ - - R4 R3 R2 R1 RO R9 Active row
row 0 (row 1-23,24).
- - C5 C4 C3 C2 Cl CO d..\ RIO Actiw column STATUS ROW BTM/TOP Row 25 displayed above or
below main text.
01 DO .il
07 06 135 Dd 03 02 R11 Active data R8 to R11 Active chapter, row, column
IR/W) IR/W) IR/W) IRANI IR/W) IR/W1 114/W1 IR/W) and data information written
to or read from page
-bit does not exist
memory via the I 2C bus.

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 34

ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

by Brian Patrick McArdle

Telecommunications channels are not so reliable that data can be passed

over them without corruption. Since data communications has become
important, satisfactory methods to identify and, if possible, correct errors
have been developed.

C ONSIDER the transfer of data as in Fig. 1

‘....between modems over atelephone line
problem is that two errors within asymbol
could cancel each other. Alternatively, when c =Ig
r +1, j
d
+I— j mod 2 [Eq. 1]
or radio link. The channel is corrupted by an erroneous symbol is identified, areceiver
=I
noise, which could result in areceiver detecting still cannot deduce the incorrect bit within
a 1instead of a0or vice versa. If this were the block and, consequently, correction is
to happen in anumber of places in amessage, out. Therefore, although the addition of a The matrix has n rows and rcolumns,
the effect could be disastrous: the message parity bit into ablock is the basis of error which correspond to the lengths of the coded
might be completely unintelligible. Obviously, detection, it is rarely satisfactory. To identify
and data blocks respectively. The top part is
there is aneed to be able to identify incorrect an incorrect symbol is one thing, but to correct
an (rxr) identity matrix that does not require
data bits. The subject is know as error detection an error in one bit is quite another. The next any explanation. The bottom part is a(kxr)
and correction. section explains amethod to identify and matrix that generates clto ckbits from the dl
correct single-bit errors. to di. bits. All the coefficients are 0or 1and
Parity the arithmetic is modulo 2. The requirement
Block codes is that, if an error occurs in adata bit, the
Parity is afamiliar concept and is explained check bits will be able to identify the particular
in most technician text books. Consider a In the following arrangement, ablock consists bit in question, which can be corrected. The
block of seven bits that is given an additional of data bits plus check bits. For example, a correction process is simply to replace a 1
bit, known as the parity bit, so that the total block of size nwould have rdata bits and by a0or vice versa.
block becomes eight bits. The term 'parity' k=n-r check bits. The check bits are derived The next step is to devise asimple method
refers to the entire new block and there are from the data bits. In reality, they are parity to identify the exact location of an incorrect
two categories. bits that are determined by various linear bit within the block. The Hamming Code is
(a)Even parity means that ablock has an combinations of data bits. For the present, it examined as asuitable example because it
even number of is. For example, if the is assumed that only one error will occur in is widely known. For instance, ablock of
data is 10 10 10 1, which has four is each block. The significance of this point seven bits consists of four data bits and three
and three Os, the parity bit would be 0 will be discussed in more detail later on. check bits in the following format:
giving four Is and four Os. The block For ablock of size n, there is atotal of nC I=n
would become 0 10 10 10 1with the errors where the corruption is limited to one position: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
parity bit as the MSB wich is the usual bit per block. The kcheck bits can have bit: d, d6 d5 c4 d3 C2 C1
location. (2 ,
-1) different combinations. This means
(b)Odd parity if it has an odd number of is. that at most (2À-1) errors can be detected. in which the data and check bits are indicated
The previous example would be 11010101 Hence, there is arequirement that (2À-1) ≥n as dand crespectively and d, as the most
with five is and three Os. in the values that can be chosen for rand k. significant bit (mss). As would be expected,
The 8-bit ASCII code has seven data bits For example, if k= 3, (2À-1) = 7, which the position of these bits within the overall
and aparity bit. Thus, the ASCII alphabet has means that n=7and r=4. Therefore, three block is very significant. The positions 3, 5,
atotal of 27 = 128 different symbols. The check bits can check up to four data bits 6,7 can be represented as various combinations
8th bit for each symbol is chosen to give only. 'The coded block would be [d4d3d2di c3c2c I] of 1, 2, 4. Thus, if d3 is incorrect, cland c2
even parity. If an error occurs in transmission or some transposition of this order. will not be validated and so on. The combinations
as in Fig. 1, aparity check would reveal an In mathematical terms, the encoding operation that give cl,c2,and c4 in terms of d3,d5, d6,
erroneous symbol. The receiver could ignore can be described with the use of amatrix as and d, are chosen accordingly as shown in
the particular symbol, provided that such an follows. Appendix A and the encoding operation is
occurrence did not happen too often, or, al- given by
ternatively, request aretransmission.
d d7 -
10 00 -
d d6
r- 0 100
d7
Transmitter d5
Receiver 00 10
d d6
r-
000...1 d1 1 1 10 C4
Additive Noise
91W14
J5
0001 (1 3
gr+1,1 - •gr+1.,
d3 _
Fig. 1. Communications channel. 1 10 1 C.

1 0 11 _
c _ 1_
In reality, aparity check on each symbol
gives very limited protection. The obvious The matrix is know as the GENERATOR
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 ERROR DETECTION AND CORRECTION

MATRIX. The receiver verifies the block by blocks do not have afixed length. The reasons
using the PARITY CHECK MATRIX (see Appendix and for this structure structure lie in the nature
A), which should produce all zeroes. In simple of language. The symbol Ein ASCII is 1000 101
terms, the receiver generates cl,c2,and ca h(x)= x4 +x2 +x+ 1 and Zis 1011010. Each symbol is represented
from the received data bits. If the generated by seven bits excluding the parity bit. However,
cland c2do not agree with the actual received as per equation 4. At this stage, the term E occurs 130 times more often in normal
values, d3 is incorrect. For example, [1 0 1 'cyclic' requires some explanation. Let w(x) text than Z. It has been estimated that normal
11 becomes [1 0 10 10 1]. If d5 is corrupted in equation 2be rewritten in the form English is 70% redundant because of these
such that [1 0 0 0 10 1] is received, the statistical properties. Consequently, the total
generated check bits are cl= 0, c2 = 0, and w(x) =cig(x) +c2xg(x) +c3x2g(x) +... number of bits required for afull message
c4 = 1. Thus cland c4 do not agree with the could be greatly reduced if the common
detected values, which indicates that d5should +c7x6g(x) [Eq. 6] symbols were represented by short blocks
not be 0but 1. The same type of result occurs The various terms as shown in Appendix and the more uncommon ones by larger blocks.
for any other error—provided there is only C consist of a set of polynomials that is A simple example is Morse code, in which
one error. If two errors had occurred with generated by shifting g(x) as in ashift register. Eis one dot, whereas Zis two dashes followed
[1 0 1 10 0 1] detected, acheck would Thus, w(x) may be considered as alinerar by two dots. Huffman codes utilize this property
indicate that d7 was incorrect. Consequently, combination of the seven states of g(x) with of redundancy to considerable advantage.
the block would be corrected to [0 0 1 1 xas a'shift'. The full set of code words is If an alphabet has m symbols, the average
00 1), which now has three errors with two generated by g(x) and hence its name. The number of bits per symbol is
in the four data bits. The importance of the reader is referred to the topic of Cyclic Groups
original assumption that the code would in Group Theory for the appropriate mathematical
only detect and correct an error in one bit background. lithe data is [1101], an estimate F= piri [E49]
per block is now fully clear. However, the of w(x), which assumes that the check bits i
=1
overall method is typical of block codes. are all zeros, is
The various positions for acode with four where pi is the probability of occurrence of
check bits that can correct up to 11 data bits w'(x) = [1 10 1000] =x6 +x5 +x3 the ith symbol, which is represented by ri
are given in Appendix B. bits. A Huffman code seeks to keep Tas
[Eq. 7] small as possible by pairing the symbol with
Cyclic codes the highest probability with the shortest block.
However, g(x) does not divide w'(x) evenly. Consider an example of aset 1S 1S2 S3 S41
Cyclic codes are similar to block codes, but There is aremainder of 1in the least significant with four symbols. Normally, each symbol
there are important mathematical differences. bit (iss) position. The correct w(x) is would be represented by atwo-bit block,
A code word of length nbits is represented such as: Si =00, S2= 0 1,S3= 10,S4 = 11.
as apolynomial of degree (n-1) as follows: w(x) = [1 10 100 1] =x6 +x5 +x3 + 1

W(X)=[Ven wn-1 wil-2 •••WI1 = [Eq. 8]

• • • 1 Sti = 111
= w„xn-1 +w„_ Ixn-2 + w2x + w1 in order to satisfy the mathematical conditions.
[Eq. 2] The procedure may be written as amatrix as o 1 o
follows
where w„ is the most significant bit (msn). It Si =0 52 = 10 S3 = 110 910014-14
is generated by apolynomial known as the 10 00
GENERATOR POLYNOMIAL, g(x), as follows:
0 100
1 A Huffman code would adopt abranch type
w(x) =c(x) g(x) mod (xn + 1) [Eq. 3] 0 0 10 0 structure as shown above. In this design, S1
is represented by only one bit, but S3 has
Most books on coding write the modulus 0 0 01
three bits. If the probabilities are pi =1/
2,p2
as (x. — 1). In this case, the mathematics 1110 = 1/4,p3 = 1/ 6,and p = 1/12 ,application of
refer directly to digital electronics. Actually, o
equation 9gives
0 111
g(x) is afactor of (xn + 1), but the other term,
c(x) does not represent the data as might be 110 1 _ r= 1( 1/
2)+ 2( 1/
4)+ 3( 1
/ 6)+ 3( 1/12)
expected. In mathematical terms, w(x) is the
product modulo (xn + 1) of two polynomials the derivation of which is in Appendix D. = 1.75 bits/symbol [Eq. 10]
with addition modulo 2between the coefficients The PARITY CHECK MATRIX to authenticate
ofthe various terms. The exact coding mechanism the code word is explained in Appendix E. which is areduction of 25%. If the probabilities
will be shown later on. If the block was corrupted to [1 10 110 1], were assigned in reverse order, 7= 2.67,
A CHECK POLYNOMIAL, h(x), has the same this new w(x) on division by g(x) would which is an increase of 67%. Hence, the im-
significance as in the previous section with have aremainder of x2.This indicates an portance of pairing the largest probability
error two shifts away from the LSB and the with the shortest block. In the special case
h(x) g(x) =xn + 1 [Eq. 4] particular bit can be corrected. However, to where the two values for Ttumed out to be
correct two or more errors, aBCH code, equal, the assignment with the lowest variance
which means that h(x) is the other factor of which uses aparticular type of generator would be taken.
(xn + 1). If areceived code word w(x) has no polynomial, is required and this topic is The entire area of Huffman codes is quite
error, outside the scope of this article. involved and the reader is referred to the
various text books in the references for further
h(x) w(x)= 0. information. Its advantage is in reducing the
[5:1 '51 Huffman codes
total number of data bits. The sequence of
Consider the example in the previous Huffman codes are not for error detection data bits can be broken into blocks and encoded
section with n= 7. In this section, this translates and correction, but deserve special mention as under "Block codes" and Cyclic codes".
tox7+ 1=0mod 2. The factors are (x3+ x+1) because they may be used in conjunction The receiver simply reverses this process by
and (x4 +x2 +x + 1) and we will use with error detection and correction codes. first decoding the error detection and correction
g(x) =x3 +x+ 1 The most important point is that the data code followed by the Huffman code.
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
36 RADIO, TELEVISION & COMMUNICATIONS

Implementation
The electronic implementation of the codes
discussed is relatively straightforward once
the actual coding mechanism is understood.
Figure 2 shows adigital electronic circuit,
which is essentially ashift register, to implement
the example under "Cyclic codes". The arrangement
is to generate the full code word of data and
check bits. The four stages in the register correspond
to the data block of four bits, which in turn
generates the three check bits. The switch may
be an AND gate with one input tied high (logic Fig. 2. Shift register as a Cyclic Encoder. The data block [w7w6w5w4] is shifted into the register. The
1) or low (logic 0) as appropriate. The other switches represent the terms of the matrix, such as 1110to generate w3. The switch is closed for 1and
input is simply the output of the bistable (flip open for O. The same arrangement with different switch settings would be required to generate w2 and w1.

flop). The addition modulo 2represented by

the in the diagram is simply and EXOR (exclusive
OR) gate. The only change is that three different
switch arrangements (open =0and closed = 1) Multiple errors of two or more bits per block References
are required to generate the three check bits. are not considered as these require more
This corresponds to the three linear combinations complex solutions. Nevertheless, it should Coding and Information Theory by R.W.
in mathematics. Thus, the complete circuit for provide an introduction for students who Hamming, Prentice-Hall, 1980.
the coding operation could consist of three are familiar with digital electronics, but have
shift registers with fixed switch positions in not previously studied this tricky topic. An Information Theory and its Engineering
parallel or one shift register with amechanism interesting point is the increasing connection Applications by D.A. Bell, Pitman, 1968.
to apply three different arrangements of the between Modern Algebra and Electronics.
switches. Alternatively, implementation could Twenty years ago, most engineers and technicians Codes and Cryptography by D. Welsh, Oxford
be by software, that is, to write aprogram would not expect to use Modern Algebra. University Press, 1988.
using the AND and EXOR logic operations of a The reader is referred to the references for
microprocessor. This method will probably further study. Telecommunications Engineering by H.G.
become more common—especially where the Brierly, Edward Arnold, 1986.
codes are more complex than these simple ex-
amples.
Figure 3 shows the circuit to check the
parity bit generated by the first
row of the PARITY CHECK MATRIX
(as explained in Appendix E)
applied to acode word. The seven
stages correspond to the seven
bits in the block. The other rows
of the matrix simply require dif-
ferent arrangements of the switches.
Both circuits are straightforward.

Conclusions
In this article Ihave attempted
to explain the basis of error
detection. It is not adetailed Fig. 3. Shift register to check acode word generated by the circuit in Fig. 2. If the PARITY BIT iS 1, one of the seven bits in
analysis and only deals with the shift register that has aclosed switch is incorrect. For the first row of the PARITY CHECK MATRIX (see Appendix E) the
the correction of single errors. switches are at 1110100. For successive rows, the appropriate settings must be used.

Appendix A
d7 d7
e4=(d, +d
6+d5)mod 2
10 00 d6 d6
c2 = (d 7 + d6 +d3)mod 2 0 100 d7
d5 d5
0 0 10 111010001
d6
cl= (d 7 +d5 + d3)mod 2 0 0 01 d3 1 10 10 10 d3
d5 10 110 0 1
1110 C4
If d7 is incorrect, el,c2 and c4 do not agree with calculated values. C4
1101 d3
C2 C2
_1 0 11_
If d6 is incorrect, c2 and c4 do not agree with calculated values.
_ 1 _ 1_
If d5 is in correct, cl and c4 do not agree with calculated values.
Generator Encoded Parity check matrix
If d3 is incorrect, cl and c2 do not agree with calculated values. matrix block

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 ERROR DETECTION & CORRECTION El

Appendix B Appendix E
Position: 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 h(x) = x4 + x2 + x+ 1 PARITY CHECK POLYNOMIAL

Bit: di5d14 di3d12dil du) d9 c8 d7 d6 (15 C4 d3 c2 cl w(x) = w7x6 + wfx5 +w9c4 w4x3 +w3x2 +w2x + WI

The check bits are thus at positions 1,2,4, and 8. h(x) w(x) =x6 (w7+ + w5 + w3) +x5(w6 + w5 + w4 + W2)

±X4 (W5 + + w3 + WI) +X3(W7 + w4 + W3 + W2)

+X2(W6 + w3 + w2 + WI) X(w7 w5 + w2 + w1)

Appendix C
=1 mod 2 + (W7 + W6 + w4+ W1)

xn +1=0 mod 2

1110 100 w 7

For n = 7 and g(x) = x3 + x + 1, representing the seven-bit state

0 1110 10 w 6
[0001011] of a shift register, the operation using shift left rather
than shift right is 0011101 w 5

10 0 1110 W 4

0001011 g(x) = x3 +x+1 01 00 11 1 W 3

0010110 xg(x) =x4 +x2 +x
10 10 0 11
0101100 x2g(x) =x5 +x3 +x2 W 2

1011000 x3g(x) =x6 +x4 +x3 x7 = 1 110 10 0 1

0110001 x4g(x) =x5 +x4 + 1 1

1100010 x5g(x) =x6 +x5 +x

1000101 x6g(x) =x6 +x2 +1 From equation 6, the PARITY CHECK POLYNOMIAL applied to a
0001011 x7g(x) =x3 +x+1 correct code word should give 0. The PARITY CHECK MATRIX should
give the zero vector.
Thus, multiplication of g(x) by xis equivalent to a left shift of one
step of the shift register. The initial state is reproduced after seven
steps.

Appendix F

An important parameter, known as the Hamming Distance, was

Appendix D
not covered under 'Block codes' as it was not required. Consider
w(x)= c(x) g(x) = [w7 w6 w5 w4 w3 W2 wd, the (7, 4) Hamming code. Any two code words differ in at least
where three bits. This minimum distance is known as the Hamming
c(x) =c4x3 + c3x2 + c2x +ch Distance. If the distance were only two, an error could only be
and detected but not corrected. Detection of a double error would
g(x) = x3 + x +1, require a distance of four.
whence
c(x) g(x) = c4x6 + c3x5 + (c4-1-c2)x4 + (c4+c3+c )x3 +

+(c3+c2)x2 + (cri-c i)x + cl.

= C4
W6 = C3
W5 = C4 + C2 C2 = W7 + W5

W4 = C4 + C3 + CI C1 = w7 +W6 + W4
w3 = C3 + C2 w3 = W7 + W6 + W5

w2 =C2 + CI w2 = W5 +W4
W1 =C1 WI = W7 + W6 + W4

w 7

10 00
6
01 00 w 7

0 0 10
6
0 001 4

1 110
W 3

0 1 11
W 2
_1101

Remember that the arithmetic is modulo 2.

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 38

LOGIC ANALYSER PART 1

by K. Nischalke and H.J. Schulz

A logic analyser is primarily intended for carrying out measure-

ments in fairly complex circuits, where an oscilloscope begins to
show its deficiencies. Unfortunately, it remains apretty expensive
instrument and it is for that reason that adesign is offered here
that can be built by most enthusiasts at areasonable cost.

S
TRICTLY speaking, it is not quite right between 16 bits (1 RAM card) and 64 bits (4
to compare an oscilloscope with alogic RAM cards). SPECIFICATION
analyser, because basically an oscilloscope Data are input into the RAM card(s) via a rY 2048 samples per
displays voltage or current as afunction of probe. The probe(s) does not consist of much channel
time, whereas alogic analyser shows data more than anumber of buffers, which are, 8192 samples per
as afunction of time. Both instruments may, however, indispensable for the correct trans- channel (100 MHz
therefore, be required in anumber of appli- port of digital signals, where fundamental fre- mode)
cations. For instance, suppose that alogic anal- quencies may be as high as 25 MHz. At the No. of channels 16
yser has indicated that the data of acertain same time, it keeps the load on the circuit per RANI card 4(100 MHz mode)
signal are not quite right. It is then possible under test to aminimum. Furthermore, it pro- Number of RAM
to check with ascope whether that is caused vides amuch neater connection between the cards up to 4
by the voltage behaviour of the signal (for analyser and the circuit under test. Clock 100 MHz; 25 MHz;
example, alogic 1may have become stuck The connection between the probe(s) and 1MHz internal)
at 1.5 V). the RAM card(s) consists of aone-metre cable, external up to 25 MHz
Furthermore, alogic analyser has more while those between the probe(s) and the cir- Clock qualifier 2(not in 100 MHz
input channels than an oscilloscope. That is cuit under test are made by short, discrete ca- mode); may be set high,
avery definite advantage when micropro- bles. This arrangement obviates the frequently low or disabled
cessors are being tested. Even an old-fash- encountered spaghetti-like mess of cables. Type of trigger centre
ioned 8-bit device with 16 address lines re- /When longer connections are required, two gger pattern set per channel: 0,1 or
quires more than the maximum four channels For more probes may be connected in series.
available on an oscilloscope. Looking at the The block diagram of the analyser, inso- • ration of 20 ns-5.12 ;Is; 'arm'
discrete signals associated with these de- far as the RAM cards and the control board trigger pattern triggering:20ns-256is
vices does not mean much, but their inter- are concerned, is shown in Fig. 2. Trigger window 40 ns-81.92 jis
relation is of great importance. When data are written via the probe(s),
Like an oscilloscope, alogic analyser needs clock frequencies of 100 MHz, 25 MHz, 1MHz
to be triggered, but the trigger signal must or an external clock may be chosen. The some-
be specially adapted for working with digi- what different mode of operation at 100 MHz latch at the input. Note that only in the 100 MHz
tal information. Instead of being triggered will be discussed later. The clock frequency mode the input latch/shift register operates
at acertain voltage level, the logic analyser determines how often the data at the inputs as ashift register. Once the input data are sam-
is triggered by agiven pattern of bits pre- of the probe are clocked (sampled) in the pled, they are written into RAM with the aid
sent at the inputs.
A computer and associated software have
become inseparable parts of the modern logic
analyser, and in proprietary instruments they
form an integral part of the construction.
The present instrument is intended for opera-
tion with an external computer, either an
IBM PC or compatible or an Atari.
RAM

Block diagrams 2k x 16
(.4s. 4calda)
PROBE

COMPUTER.
INTERFACE
The general design of the analyser is shown (EM MAuri)

in Fig. 1. The interface in the computer is

BUS PCB
connected to the busboard of the analyser. The
analyser proper consists of acontrol board
and up to four RAM cards.
The control of the analyser is an indepen-
POWER
dent circuit whose paRAMeters are deter- SUPPLY
CONTROL

mined by the computer. That independence

is imperative, because few computers can han- 900094,1
dle clock frequencies of 25 MHz or 100 MHz
in real time. The prime tasks of the circuit
are the control of the triggering and the ad-
dressing of the memory. The length of the
memory is always 2K, while its width lies Fig. 1. General design of the logic analyser.
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 LOGIC ANALYSER PART 1
39

*Odra» I
bus
Input
address RAM latch/ 16 bit
latch
counter 2k x16 shift probe
reg ster

4 Fvw control

.1 trigger 1
counter 4
AR

window register tri -stale • WOr -

counter select butler recognize,

start
card select

data
(
trigger boa word •
counter 2 latch

100 MHz clock

clock :2 DCLI( select

A Mop

25 MHz
:2

o
A
post
con rol trigger
:25
IMHz logic counter

external clock
900094.1-12
external qualifiers

Fig. 2. Block diagram of the RAM cards and the control board of the logic analyser.

QQ 00 00 00 00

Fig. 3. The busboard is hardly more than an assembly of wiring and connectors.
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 TEST AND MEASUREMENT

WorldRadioHistory

Fig. 4. The printed circuit busboard of the logic analyser.

ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991

 LOGIC ANALYSER PART 1
41

of the signal R/W control. Subsequently, the cessed in the computer. ger condition is met when counter 1, after it
address counter is increased by 1.This pro- The basic operation of the circuit is not has been triggered by the second section of
cess continues uninterruptedly; when the much different in the 100 MHz mode, but the recognizer, has counted to capacity and
RAM has been written to capacity, the pro- everything happens just alittle faster. This, gives astart pulse. In other words, the anal-
cess starts anew: the oldest data are replaced however, creates aproblem: the RAM can- yser is started if it is first triggered by the 'arm'
by the new data. The advantage of this ar- not cope with this higher speed. This is the signal and then, within agiven time (the
rangement will be discussed later. reason that the shift register used as input window), by asecond signal. In the third
To enable the analyser being triggered, the latch in the other modes is used as ahigh- case, the period (the window) during which
sampled data are compared with the data in speed shift register in the 100MHz mode. Four triggering should have taken place has lapsed.
the word-latch by the word recognizer. This successive data samples are input into the reg- The circuit will then wait for the first trigger
latch has information as to whether each bit ister, which has the effect of lowering the ('arm') to recur. The double triggering is of
should be a0, a1or 'don't care' to comply frequency at which the data is offered to the particular advantage when measurements are
with the trigger conditions. Once the wanted RAM to 25 MHz. The latch between the shift carried out in microprocessor systems in
word pattern has been accepted by the rec- register and the RAM ensures that the data which certain bit patterns occur regularly. The
ognizer, it is passed to trigger counter 1via are present long enough at the inputs of the intercoupling of two bit patterns greatly im-
lines 'trigger' and 'arm'. Note that these lines RAM, because, in spite of their shifting, the proves the provision of astable and unam-
have aseparated function in the 100 MHz data at the outputs of the shift register will biguous triggering.
mode only: normally, they are electronically not remain stable for longer than 10 ns.
interconnected. When these lines indicate that Unfortunately, when the shift register is The software
the desired trigger condition is present, counter used as alatch, 16 inputs per RAM card are
1will verify that this condition is present for available. Because of the shift operation, that What may be done with the data collected
as long as the counter counts. If this is not is limited to four inputs per card in the 100 MHz by the hardware is shown in Fig. 5, which is
so, the analyser is not triggered. When the mode. On the other hand, four times as much the (German) program for Atari computers.
counter has stopped counting, the trigger con- data can now be written into RAM since four The English translation, which has unfortu-
dition is met and the analyser is started. samples may be located at one address. nately been delayed beyond this issue, and
Counter 2and the window counter only func- Furthermore, because of the lower number the program for IBM PCs and compatibles,
tion in the 100 MHz mode. of inputs, the word recognizer may be bisected, which is virtually identical to that for the Atari,
When counter 1has started the analyser, which increases the number of instants that will be published in afuture issue.
the control logic block clocks the post-trigger triggering takes place. Both trigger words may be set in the col-
counter which checks how many samples Because of the bisecting of the word rec- umn at the extreme left on the monitor screen,
have been taken of the input data after trig- ognizer, the signals 'arm' and 'trigger' are sep- but note that trigger word 2is not active.
gering. As soon as 1024 samples have been arated. When the section of the recognizer that The program can handle up to four trigger
taken, the post-trigger counter stops the anal- provides the 'arm' pulse accepts the trigger settings. Which of these is selected at any
yser and gives an interrupt to the computer. condition, counter 2is started. Like trigger one time is indicated by the figure under the
This arrangement ensures that no more than counter 1, this counter must check whether column containing the trigger words. Beside
1024 bytes can be written to RAM before trigger- the trigger condition lasts long enough. If that this is the setting of the minimum duration
ing takes place, so that later the computer can is so, the window counter is started. As long of the trigger pattern and the length of the
analyse data before and after triggering. This as this counter runs, three situations may occur: trigger window.
is the reason that before triggering the data (a) the 'arm' trigger word appears again; (b) The column beside that for the trigger
are written into RAM continuously. the second trigger condition is met; and (c) words contains the names of the signals.
As soon as the analyser is disabled, the the window counter has counted to capac- Apart from the standard indication "chan-
block register select and the three-state buffer ity. In the first case, trigger counter 2and the nel so and so", these signals may be given
in the computer divide the 16-bit wide words window counter are reset, so that the trig- more informative names. Also, it is possible
into two 8-bit wide bytes which are then pro- gering process starts anew. The second trig- to arrange them in adifferent order on the
screen and to display them more than once.
For example, associated signals maybe placed
side by side on the screen without the necessity
Desk Datei Drucker Modus ptionen of changing over test probes. The column may
188 MHZ
28 MHZ
HL -run1 =L
-.- also be used to indicate from which test probe
7 rl the signal comes.
e CH: 1 MHz
;1 X CH: 3 1.-J- 1—f1.11.11.11.1" The larger part of the screen is, of course,
1X X CH: 4 EXTERN 1.11--FWLFL.11 reserved for the display of signals, and it can
!1 X CH: 5 r-1
t* -- LE1—r- **** Lfl handle up to 16 of these simultaneously. Other
1 X CH: 6
13 X CH: 7 channels may be brought on to the screen by
X X CH: 8 scrolling via the window at the bottom left.
X X CH: 9 61 -1-.1 .1-11-1 1 The control for shifting the signals to the left
X CH: 16 71--11 EL and right is situated at the bottom right.
X X CH: 11 rl
1.1 Above that is an indication where the (so far
X UN 12 U 1.1 ."
13 --J invisible) cursor is situated with respect to the
X X. CH:
X X CH: 14 triggering point, and which data (hexadeci-
1 X CH: 15 Lt . Ur-- U uLr1.flfuU mal) are portrayed.
X X CH: 16 L111-1-1- 1-1- 1 F11- 1.11J The block 'solution' enables the deter-
1, Triggermort > 18 ns1 [ Rufldsung 1212! Ell mining of how many samples are required
2< Trugerwort > X11:Dak Status : 64 65 76 80 SUCHEN on the screen simultaneously.
11]
le ns
Distanz 18 ns Rbstand o ns The pull-down menus provide the fol-
lowing functions: (a) information about the
•4 • 10
Kanal: 116 O 1 EINLESEN << program (desk); (b) storing on disk of the data
•4
to be analysed (datei); (c) printing of the data
900094 -1-14
(printer); (d) selecting the clock frequency
Fig. 5. Screen view showing what the program can do. Drucker =printer; Modus =mode; Optionen vari- (mode); and (e) various functions (options).
ous functions; Triggerwort =trigger word; Kanal =channel; Einlesen =to write; Datei =data in; Auflásing (to be continued)
=. resolution; Suchen =to search; Abstand =distance. (Proper English translation will be published soon).

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 rei

23/24-CM FM ATV RECEIVER

This review deals with the recently introduced 23/24 cm FM Amateur
Television (ATV) receiver from EHC (Valves) Ltd. At the time of
writing, it is the only complete system that can be purchased in a
'ready-to-go' state. That is, all you have to is connect the DC shack
supply, plug in a 24-cm aerial, avideo monitor and a loudspeaker or
headphones, tune in a signal, and away you go.

by Mike Wooding,
G6IQM

A LTERNATIVELY, the
IF board and the down
to the printed circuit
board, including the first
converter sub-sections can be
local oscillator, which
purchased separately for in-
reduces frequency drift
clusion in your own system,
to avery low level after
or for building your own ver-
only a few minutes
sion of the receiver. However,
warm-up. The output
this option will require anum-
from the first down con-
ber of external components
verter is 168 MHz,
such as ameter, controls, soc-
which is routed to asec-
kets, etc., to be added.
ond down converter.
This is external to the
Description die-cast box, and com-
prises a dual-IC tuned
The receiver is housed in agrey coloured ing is abulkhead coaxial cable connection circuit that converts the first IF of 168 MHz
moulded impact-proof PVA plastic box type, connected to the down converter by a
to asecond IF at 39 MHz for input to the de-
measuring 23.5x18.25x9.5 cm including short length of coaxial cable. modulator.
the feet, with the control knobs on the front The two PCBs are the wide-band IF am- The 39-MHz signal is amplified by an-
panel, and the sockets on the rear panel mak- plifier and the IF receiver assemblies. Both other dual-IC circuit and then buffered by an
ing the unit 21.5 cm deep in total. The case boards are constructed from double-sided emitter follower stage, which matches the
also features adjustable front feet, allowing copper-clad material, and are custom-built signal to the phase-locked loop demodula-
the unit to be tilted upwards to facilitate for each unit. All interconnecting wires and
tor. After demodulation, the video signal
reading the meter. cable are neatly formed and retained with passes through an emitter follower buffer
The front panel controls comprise, from cable ties.
stage, astandard (non-switchable) CCIR de-
the left to the right: an on/off switch, aTUN- The TUNING control is a precision 10- emphasis circuit, and an audio subcarrier
ING control, aVID. GAIN control and aVOL- turn potentiometer, which facilitates fine- trap. The latter is followed by avideo ampli-
UME control. Also featured on the front tuning of the band with only one control. fier and a75-e video output buffer.
panel is a red LED for ON/OFF indication, The VID. GAIN and VOLUME controls are or-
The audio subcarrier is extracted at the
and the tuning-frequency meter. The front dinary 270-degree potentiometers. The tun- buffer stage following the demodulator, and
panel bezel is sign-written with the various ing frequency meter is astandard 90-degree
is fed into aswitchable filter network to se-
control and switch functions. movement type with the scale calibrated lect either 5.5 MHz or 6.0 MHz, depending
The rear panel connections are as fol- with a logarithmic frequency read-out on the signals being received. After the filter
lows: a 3.5-mm jack socket for the loud- scaled in 10-MHz steps, with main divisions
stage, the signal is routed to a single IC
speaker/headphone connection, a phono at 1240, 1260, 1300 and 1320 MHz.
audio demodulator, and from there to an out-
socket for video output, aBNC socket for
put stage. The audio volume control varies
aerial connection, and aDC socket for the
Circuit outline the output from 0to about 1W into an 8-S2
power supply input. Also mounted on the load, or 2W into a44. 2load.
rear panel is a20-mm fuse holder. The number of controls has been kept to a The receive frequency indication meter
Internally, the receiver has adie-cast box minimum, i.e., tuning, video gain, volume is driven by sampling the tuning voltage ap-
and two printed circuit boards mounted onto and changeover from 5.5 MHz to 6.0 MHz plied to the varicap tuning diode. A poten-
the housing chassis. All earth connections sound subcarrier. This latter switch also
tiometer network allows the meter range to
are bonded to this chassis for screening se- changes the polarity of the video output be adjusted to compensate for the different
curity. from negative on 6 MHz (UK and most of characteristics of different varicap diodes.
The die-cast box, measuring 120x Europe) to positive on 5.5 MHz (France).
95x35 mm, houses the down converter with The first down converter section (housed
power connections made via feed-through in adie-cast box) uses parallel-tuned circuits Bench test
capacitors, and the IF output by means of a to give agood rejection of broadcast TV sig-
In view of the fact that the receiver is sup-
coaxial cable. The aerial input soéket nals, radar and other in-band signals. All the plied as a complete unit, the nature and
mounted through the rear panel of the hous- SHF and UHF tuned circuits are etched on depth of the bench test were different com-

ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991 WorldRadioHistory

 23/24-CM FM ATV RECEIVER 43

pared to other reviews Ihave conducted in Off-air tests

the past. However, what Iconsider to be es- T EQUIPMENT USED
sential tests Iwas able to carry out, and the To conduct the off-air tests Isimply com-
FOR THIS REVIEW
results are discussed below. pared the unit against my own Wood &
The noise floor of the receiver with the Douglas/BATC home brew system, which
• Marconi 2383 Spectrum Analyser
aerial input terminated with a5041 load was has given me excellent results in the past.
and Tracking Generator
averaged out at —85 dBm. Three spurious Having two 24-cm aerials of the same type
and at the same height, and separate video • Racal Dana 9087 Signal Generator
signals were found at 1116 MHz (signal
level: —25 dBm), 2232 MHz (-35 dBm) and monitors made this task easy. • Philips PIV15646 Television Pattern
3348 MHz (-60 dBm). However, although First, Iused the signals from GB3RT, the Generator
they were at not inconsiderable levels, there Coventry 24-cm FM ATV repeater, which I • Hewlett Packard 890313 Audio Ana-
did not appear to be any detraction in the receive normally at P5 (broadcast quality). lyser
performance of the down converter. The pictures from the review unit were just • Philips PM3226 Digitising Oscillos-
It ought to be said here that in virtually all as good as my own system, once the correct cope
circuits employing these relatively simple, video output level was obtained with the
• Fluke 8050A Digital Multimeter
but stable, oscillators working at the direct front panel control. The tuning control,
being a multi-turn type, allowed for easy • Racal Dana 9232 Bench Power Sup-
conversion frequency, harmonics and spuri-
ous signals will inevitably be produced. The tuning across the signal, enabling me to fine ply
trick is to tailor the circuitry such that they tune with considerable ease. The picture did
are either suppressed, or at frequencies out- have atendency to bounce about somewhat
side the operating range of the receiver it- until the correct tuning point was achieved, ing scale where my transmissions could be
self. Also, care must be taken that these and the demodulator took asecond or two to found.
harmonics and spurious signals do not de- stabilize. This Itook to indicate that owing Perhaps this test is alittle unfair in ex-
sensitize the front end of the converter, espe- to the strength of the received signal the IF pecting the unit to perform without fault, but
cially when this is based on GaAs-FET stages were in limiting, hence perhaps is must be remembered that this is the modus
devices and strip-line techniques. slightly overloading the following stages. operandi in many an ATV shack. The ability
The sensitivity of the receiver was This has to be tempered alittle by explaining to monitor your own transmitted signal is a
checked by injecting signals from the Racal that the signals Ireceive from GB3RT, al- must, and most of us admit to doing it by
Dana 9087 Signal Generator, and tracking though it is some 16 km away, are very using our own receivers, rather than 'snif-
the output of the second IF stage with the strong indeed. fing' the output RF and demodulating that
Marconi 2383 Spectrum Analyser. With an Next, Iturned the aerials northwards to- back to video.
input frequency of 1249 MHz, asignal level wards GB3GV, the Leicester 24-cm FM
of —71 dBm was required to give an IF sig- ATV repeater, which Inormally receive at
Conclusions
nal 3dB up on the noise floor, or, in other P3 to P4. The results from the review unit
words, just about the minimum signal level were marginally worse than my own unit as Overall Iquite liked the unit. As it stands, it
that could be detected as sync pulses. At the far as the strength of the received picture it- is at present the only complete receiver
other end of the band, 1320 MHz, aslightly self was concerned, but the actual definition available fully built, aligned and ready to go.
lower input of —72 dBm was required to of the picture itself was, to all intents and The presentation is tidy, and the operation
give a 3-dB lift. These signal levels of purposes, identical. simplicity itself.
around —70 dBm equate to aperformance of Having checked at the top of the band, it Ido not really like the external video out-
the receiver similar to that of most of the was time to see how it fared where most of put level control. Ifeel that the output should
equipment at present operated by ATV-ers. us ATV-ers operate, at the bottom end, be internally preset at 1V at 75 SI, which is
The maximum signal levels before the around 1249 MHz. For this purpose Ien- the international standard. This would over-
IF stages went into limiting were —29 dBm listed (as usual) the good offices of my fel- come the tendency of many people to incor-
at 1249 MHz, and —27 dBm at 1320 MHz, low GB3RT group members Tony GOHOV, rectly drive their video monitors and cause
which indicated agood large signal hand- and John G 1 IJT. The received pictures all poorer pictures to be displayed.
ling capability (-30 dBm is equivalent to exhibited good video definition and chro- Ialso feel that the CCIR de-emphasis
1mW). minance response (apart from Tony's network should be made switchable. There
Being unable to apply an external modu- camera, but that's another story). By moving are many stations who do not use pre-em-
lating signal greater than 100 kHz to the the aerial away from each station Iwas able phasis in their transmissions, or at best, in-
Racal signal generator, Ihad to inject a to simulate very low received signals, and correct levels of emphasis. To be able to
modulated signal into the demodulator itself only at very low levels was the review unit select the de-emphasis network allows for
at the second IF frequency from the Philips found to be less sensitive than my own, but the correct reception of such signals. Other-
PM5646 Television Pattern Generator, and this was at picture strengths barely report- wise, poorly defined and blurred pictures re-
view the output on avideo modulator. The able as P1 (corresponding to just discernible sult, which hardly helps to boost confidence
resulting picture showed good definition prominent features, locked syncs). in the receiver.
and alinear chrominance response. The final test was to monitor my own The FM ATV receiver is available from
Using the same method as above, a 1- transmissions. Again with the aid of Tony as EHC (Valves) Ltd., 7 Pavement Square,
kHz audio signal was also injected from the the receiving station (for licence complicity Lower Addiscombe Road, Croydon. Tele-
test pattern generator, and the resultant purposes, you understand) Itransmitted at phone: (081 654) 7172, at acost of £230.00
audio signal measured on the HP 8903B an output level of 2.5 W from my basic including VAT. Carriage is extra at £3.34.
Audio Analyser. The frequency recovery transmitter, and then at 60 W with my linear Finally, I wish to thank Mr. Brian
was found to be excellent, with the amplifier connected in. The results from the Aylward of EHC (Valves) Ltd., for the loan
measured output signal reading 998 Hz. The review unit at both power levels were the of the review unit, and for his advice and as-
distortion level at maximum output into a8- same, and quite abit worse than with my sistance. •
nload was measured at 3.154%. own system. The resultant video output was
The current consumption of the re- quite unstable at times, with obvious sync
ceiver at a supply voltage of 13.5 V was crushing taking place in the overloaded de-
measured at about 225 mA with no audio modulator. As with my own system, there
output, and 520 mA at full audio output. was also amultitude of points along the tun-
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 44

THE COMPLETE PREAMPLIFIER (1)

by T. Giffard

After the several `spartan' preamplifiers we have published over

the past few years, we feel the time has come to offer our readers
a more sophisticated design, one with more controls than just a
selector switch and avolume control. Although the design
presented has quite afew useful features, and offers very good
signal handling qualities, we have been able
to keep its price to a reasonable level.

L./OOKING around in hi-fi dealers' and immediately adjacent to the the inputs at the of the signal to aspecial headphone ampli-
retailers' shops (and talking to the man- rear of the enclosure, so that long signal fier that consists of an opamp and discrete
ager or owner), it appears that amajority of paths are avoided. output stage. It provides enough power for
(prospective) preamplifier buyers are in- Either switch is followed by abuffer, driving low-resistance headphones.
tertested in at least some of the following which in turn is followed by astereo/mono
features. First on the list is acopying facil- switch which uses asumming opamp. This The circuits
ity that is independent of the selector switch; obviates the level differences that frequently
second, the possibility of recording from occur in stereo/mono systems. The blocks of diagram Fig. 1are easily rec-
one recorder to another; third, atone control The tone control is a low-high design ognized in the circuits of Fig. 2. and Fig. 3.
with variable cut-off frequencies; fourth, a with two cut-off points at either side. The con- The circuit has been split into two to corre-
headphone output (which means that the trol range has been kept fairly limited to spond more closely to the drawings of the
main amplifier can be switched off if listen- avoid overdriving of subsequent stages; it associated printed-circuit boards.
ing only via the headphones is required); fifth is, however, more than adequate for normal Figure 2 shows the record and source
(and surprising in these days of the Compact usage and offers smooth operation. For those switches SI and S2 with associated buffers,
Disc), adynamic pickup input. And, of course, who do not want tone control in any cir- IC Iand IC 2,and all inputs and outputs with
the preamplifier must not degrade the signal cumstances, it may be taken out of circuit the exception of that for the headphones. Each
in any way. by asimple 'tone defeat' switch. input is shunted by apotential divider, for
With these requirements, and that of low The balance and volume control are fol- instance, 12 1-R 2 for the lefthand CD chan-
cost, in mind, we have come up with aunit lowed by the output amplifier, which provides nel. These dividers largely determine the
that meets them handsomely and still offers the only amplification of the line signals. input imedance of 42_1.itissachljele
1c i- to
the possibility of using ICs of different price The_oparnp chosen for this stage is able to use the dividers o if really necessary,
classes. drive loads of 600 SI and higher. si ethey may adversely affect the cross-talk
The design lends itself to fairly easy con- A relay providing adelay at switch-on is between the left- and right-hand channels,
struction. The source and record selector provided at the output: this gives the unit a as well as between the inputs. If dividers are
switches are housed on abusboard, together few seconds after the supply is switched on not used, resistors RI,R3, R5, and so on
with the input and output connectors, while to stabilize during which period no signal is should be replaced by wire bridges.
the remainder of the electronics is fitted on applied to the output. The CD input has some additional facili-
amotherboard. The controls are connected The output amplifier also supplies part ties. Normally, the analogue CD signal is
to the circuitry via anumber of terminals
that are situated at the front edge of the moth-
erboard.

Overview

The block diagram of the preamplifier—see

Fig. 1, shows that there are six inputs, of which
one is the dynamic pick-up input. If that
input is not needed, it may be transformed
to anormal line input by asimple wire bridge.
The CD input has provision for adding a
board (for instance, adigital-to-analogue con-
verter) at alater date.
The input signals are fed to two rotary
switches: one for selecting the input mode
(i.e., the signal that will be processed, and
the other for selecting asignal to be recorded.
In that way, it is possible to record from a
CD and continue listening to the tuner. Standard
rotary switches are used since these are much
cheaper than the 12 relays that would other-
wise be necessary. The switches are located Fig. 1. Block diagram of the preamplifier.
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 THE COMPLETE PREAMPLIFIER (1)
45

Fig. 2. Circuit diagram of the busboard

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
46 AUDIO & HI-FI

-0-410.
s .e 0-0-
C16 RI7

644

15V BC550C
MIM
100,1700
40V
LS6a
C47 C86

DEFEAT
4775V117n TOOnT% o

(MD)
0

0 10k

I.6

C
47 10k
25V

A0
0
_ S
:159
J

15V 6
8C560C
642
4.7"

IC12
IC3 C99
12V
0
641
2
77n 770 77k 77n

15V
25V 25V

F
*MO left
S5b

M0
649

22k
9:

TONE
CA71016

100n710k
40V
0
lu
560

649
I.•

Plb

10k

1N4001
12V
1N4001
Dll

15V K1
IC9 15V
7815e 015Ve
C79

15V
Imn e

C81 .1.
0
no can

15V
no C94
11110 WM 0 MIM
47n

100n 2200k
40V

C87 C88

B1 B80C1500
030
MM

7 77n 77n TN
101:1,1 2200k
40V 1COn

• 0
25V

7915.
.1.

15Vo
15V 15V
25V 25V
25V
0

Fig. 3. Circuit diagram of the motherboard.

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 THE COMPLETE PREAMPLIFIER (1)
47

15V 15)/'

1C8

D4
1N4148
15V 15V I 1+11

V2210140006-8101 El 12V

onu

®15V'
1C414
.6

=150n

BD139

R67

74

BD140

015V'

09
N4148

823101,46006-13101 11+
0 1 12V

8142 e

Line

¡
IL

1121
R91

78

BD140
3
150n
0151/'

890169-1-13

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKT()R ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
48 AUDIO & HI-FI

applied direct to the CD input. A wire bridge pling capacitors. The input capacitance is to give asensitivity at the line inputs of
between A and B (E and F) feeds the signal determined primarily by C72, whose value 150 mV r.m.s. for anominal output of 1V
to the two rotary switches. Terminals C, D depends on what is required by the pick-up. r.m.s. (if a'real' balance control is used).
and ground (G, H and ground) enable adig- If that is not known, 47 pF may be assumed. Immediately at the output of the opamp
ital input, coupled to aseparate digital-to-ana- Because of the direct coupling, the offset of are two_p_arallel-connected 10 1.1F film ca-
logue amplifier, to be provided at alater the opamp depends on the internal resis- pacitors, C24— anci—Ci¡JhàfiiscWiany off-
stage. tance of the pick-up and P6 is therefore.pro- set in the preamplifier from the power am-
The dynamic pick-up input also has ad- vided to cancel the offset a riate. plifier in use (remember that all opamps
ditional facilities. Normally, the associated ThesuppIytiflëiithis sensitive stage have in the signal path are DC coupled when the
preamplifier on the motherboard is con- been provided with additional filters (around tone control is not in circuit). The layout
nected between K and J(left-hand channel) T5 and T6)to even out any ripple on the of the printed-circuit board allows the use
and between M and L (right-hand channel). ±15 V supply. It should be noted in this con- of either MKT or MKP types.
If adynamic pick-up input is no longer re- text that the use of an L1219a. iLLustified
. The output contains arelay that provides
quired, the input may be used as microphone only in conjunction with low-impedance adelayat switch-on to suppress any switch-
input, for which the preamplifier is easily signar-szntt'esrandi- rd high- ing noises in the power amplifier. This
adapted, or as line input, in which case the impeda-nce dynamic pick-up is used, an OP27 relay may be switched off if listening via
preamplifier is not used and J-K and M-L will be perfectly all right, since the total headphones only is required. The delay cir-
must be linked by wire bridges. noise then consists primarily of the thermal cuit is based on T9. When the supply is
The opamps shown in the circuit diagram noise emanated by the pick-up. switched on, capacitor C78 is charged slowly
are not necessarily the cheapest types, but The mono-stereo switch, S5, is preceded via resistor R93, so that it takes alittle time
they are the best for the particular purpose by asumming amplifier, IC 3,that provides before the base-emitterjunction voltage has
as far as our prototypes showed. This aspect true addition of the left- and right-hand chan- reached the value at which the transistor
will be touched upon again in Part 2under nels without any attenuation when stereo switches on. When the supply voltage is re-
Construction. For the moment, as an exam- signals are to be processed as mono ones. moved, C78 discharges fairly rapidly via D5
ple, buffer IC I is aTjeJ12n inexpen- Passive circuits always introduce some at- and the relay is deenergized virtually in-
sive yet excellent double opamp, whereas tenuation. stantly. The circuit has its own rectifier net-
buffer IC2,, aType AD712, is amuch dearer Although the design of the tone-control work, 129 5-R 96 -C 91 -D 10 -D 11 ,that makes
type. This type was touna necessary to ob- stage, IC4,appears conventional, it has some rapid switch-off possible.
viate audible switching noises when S2 is interesting aspects. Usually, the connections The headphone amplifier consists of a
turned. These noises result from the change to the ends of the carbon tracks of the 'high' Type 5532, IC 8a ,and adiscrete comple-
in total resistance at the input of the opamp: potentiometers are via capacitors that deter- mentary output stage, T3 and T4. Three
if, for instance, the CD input is used, R18 is mine the onset of the control. If the onset diodes, D 1—D 3,ensure correct class-A op-
shunted by R2. If an opamp with transistor frequency is to be altered, the value of both eration. The amplifier delivers sufficient
inputs, such as the NE5532, were used, the capacitors needs to be changed. In the pre- power for driving low-impedance and in-
change in resistance would cause acorre- sent design, only one component per chan- sensitive headphones (with the exception
sponding change in the output of the opamp. nel needs to be altered. Switches S3 and S4 of electro-static ones that often require a
An opamp with FEr inputs, such as the AD712, enable two different onset frequencies to be real power amplifier). The 100 resistor
hardly reacts to the resistance change. If selected. The circuit is consequently some- in the output limits the maximum current,
notwithstanding this aTyZ.j.s used, Ri6' le what simpler as regards wjtring and switching. which can rise to 100 mA with an output
and R36 should be re Iucq20 kn. The A 1Ma resistor, Reprovides afeed- impedance of 8SI. The amplification of
input • reduce to about back loop that prevents the output of the the stage has been set to avalue at which
39 kû, and this means that the ratio of the opamp from rising to unwanted heights if clipping of the line output voltage of 1V
potential divider will change slightly. the wiper of the 'low' potentiometer occa- just does not occur.
Apart from the inputs, the busboard also sionally loses contact with the carbon track. The supply of the output stages, IC8,
contains all the outputs: two tape outputs with Capacitors C14 and C15 have been added T3, T4, T7, and T8, has its own decoupling,
an output impedance of 100 LI, determined to ensure that the offset of the input buffers provided by R97, R98, Cm, and Cull ,to
by R13, R14 ,R31, and R32; and two line out- is not amplified in the tone control stage. prevent any feedback to the other opamps
puts, also with an output impedance of about This parallel network of abipolar and afilm in the amplifier when the output current is
100 S1, determined by R15, R16, R33, and capacitor guarantees faithful signal pro- high.
R34, and R55 and Rgo on the motherboard. cessing even at high frequencies. The con- The power supply of the preamplifier
The circuit contained on the motherboard trol range for various onset frequencies is is simplicity itself: abridge rectifier, B1,
is shown in Fig. 3. Since the design of the left- shown in Fig. 4 (published in our next decoupled by capacitors C79—C82, buffer
and right-hand channels is identical, only issue). If required, the entire tone control capacitors Cg4 and C88, and two regulator
the left-hand one will be referred to in what may be taken out of circuit by S6. ICs, IC9 and IC 10 .Note that each IC in
follows. It is recommended to use the very best the preamplifier has additional supply de-
The preamplifier for the dynamic pick- quality potentiometers for the balance and coupling in the form of an electrolytic and
up is shown somewhat away from the main volume controls, for instance,.. aceramic capacitor.
circuit to emphasize its short connections to These are not cheap, but they give consis- (to be continued)
terminals J-K and L-M on the busboard. The tently good performance over along life.
opamp chosen for this stage is avery-low- In some locations, areal balance control
no. 13. If that is found too ex- may be difficult or even impossible to ob-
pensive, the cheaper OP27 or 5534 may be tain: the right type has half-silvered tracks
used. The RIAA (IEC) correction is provided so that no attenuation occurs in the centre
by R81—R83 and C58—C61. Network R12-C62- position. If so, astandard linear stereo po-
C63 forms ahigh-pass filter with acut-off tentiometer may be used with a2k2 resis-
frequency of 20 Hz to conform to the IEC re- tors soldered between its wiper and the pole
quirement. If that frequency is thought un- of S6a:the attenuation in the centre posi-
necessary, the values of C62 and C63 may be tion is then minimal.
increased. The line amplifier, IC i t,
is aT .:1. TE5534,
.
The input of the preamplifier for the dy- which has the advantage of frigalii"-
éto
namic pick-up is entirely Pc-coupled to ob- deliver more than 8V r.m.s. into a600 1 2
-
viate any degradation of the signal by cou- load. Its amplification has been set at x6.6
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 49

IN QUEST OF A PANGRAM FINAL PART

by Lee C.F. Sallows

Bimagic pairs and banana- one c's this time and twenty-six the next. I tain exactly the same letters). The letter con-
have even known the delight of hearing tent being identical, the numbers named
grams someone patiently explain to me that such a could only be the same, and this is not the
l' astill later stage, Iconstructed asec- thing can only be apatent logical impossi- case. Taking into account both their slippery
ond set of matrix cards representing bility! character and the ban on anagrams, Ipro-
number-words in Dutch. Besides another se- Logic, however, should never be con- pose aspecial name for these curiosities: ba-
ries of ordinal pangrams, one of the fruits of fused with logologic. The pair of autograms nanagrams. Beside their occurrence in
this excursion into anew language was: above is, of course, no more than asingle text bimagic autograms, a search for banana-
to which two solutions have been found. In grams could easily form aseparate study in
Dit autogram bevat vijf a's, twee h's, twee c's, drie concrete terms: having halted at afirst solu- its own right.
cf s, zevenenveertig ès, zes f's, vijf g's, twee h's, tion, the machine was set running again so How rare are bimagic cases? Of the
ve. Frtien i's, vijf j's, een k, twee /'s, twee m's, as to examine all remaining combinations roughly one in eight initial texts to yield a
zeventien n's, twee a's, een p, een q, zes r's, vier- and in this case succeeded in finding another simple autogram, again something like one
entwintig s's, achttien t's, twee u's, elf Vs, negen one. The possibility of such bimagic sen- in eight of these turn out to have dual solu-
w's, een x, een yen vijf z's. tences had been in my head from the first. tions. Is this coincidence, or might atheory
Little did Idream that such apair might also be developed for predicting it? One might
Happlily, this furnishes the first-ever truly have amagic Dutch translation! As usual, suppose the frequencies will change with dif-
impeccable magic translation, an earlier find though, the unexpected bonus is only aspur ferent kinds of text, and yet experiments in
being: to greed, and one ends up regretting that the Dutch give very similar results. Trimagic au-
foreign version is not bimagic, too. tograms (and their associated trimagic ba-
This autogram contains five a's, one h, two c's, Discovery of amagic quadruple is an obvi- nanagrams) are naturally even rarer. Several
two d's, thirty-one es, five f's, five g's, eight h's, ous goal for future research. hundred runs with the machine have located
twelve i's, one j, one k, two /'s, two m's, eighteen Though at first sight twisty, the cunning only one (with the unstimulating text, "this
n's, sixteen a's, one p, one q, six r's, twenty-seven interlock between bimagic pairs is neatly twenty-first pangram scored ..."). A finer
s's, twenty-one t's, three u's, seven v's, eight w's, brought out through arather whimsical ex- example of the polymagic genre is:
three x's, four y's, and one z. ample:
This pangram tables but five a's, three h's, one c,
Notice that en" is now reproduced as afully- This angram contains four a's, two h's, two c's, two d's, twenty-eight c's, six f's, four g's, six h's,
fledged "and". Strictly, it is inaccurate to one d, twenty-seven c's, eight f's, four g's, five ten i's, one j, one k, three /'s, two m's, seventeen
speak of atranslation in such cases, since the h's, ten i's, one j, one k, one 1, two m's, twenty n's, n's, twelve os, two p's, one q, seven r's, twenty-
number-words themselves are not (in gen- fifteen a's, one q, six r's, twenty-seven s's, eigh- nine s's, twenty t's, five u's, six Vs, eight w's, four
eral) preserved. A preferable expression teen t's, five u's, five Vs, seven H, 's, three x's, four x's, four y's, and one z.
might be transcription. Another point, you y's, one z, but no -.
might say, is that translations are inherently But this pangram tables five a's, three h's, one c,
interpreter-dependent, whereas it is hardly This angram contains four a's, two h's, two c's, two d's, twenty-nine c's, six f's, six g's, eight h's,
likely that personal preference would influ- one d, twenty-seven c's, eight f's, four g's, five eleven i's, one j, one k, three /'s, two m's, seventeen
ence an outcome here. h's, eleven i's, one j, one k, two 's, two m's, twenty n's, fourteen a's, two p's, one q, eight r's, twenty-
Hardly likely, yet the local curvature of n's, fifteen a's, one q, six r's, twenty-seven s's, eight s's, twenty-two- i's, six u's, four Vs, eight
logological space can warp judgement much nineteen t's, five u's, six Vs, eight w's, three x's, w's, four x's, four y's, and one z.
as it can warp asense of humour. Here, for four y's, one z, but no -.
instance, is adifferent English rendering of The false modesty of the first is countered by
the same Dutch sentence, which is neverthe- Abstracting the non-overlapping items for the second one turning the tables!
less another flawless magic transcription: comparison shows: aim So much then for the products of the pan-
gram machine. Far from everything has
This autogram contains five a's, one h, two c's, ten i's eleven i's found room for inclusion here. Aside from
two d's, twenty-six c's, six f's, two g's, four h's, one / two /'s space considerations, the charm of such
thirteen i's. one j, one k, one /, two m's, twenty- eighteen t's nineteen i's baubles is limited, one autogram soon seem-
one n's, sixteen a's, one p, one q, five r's, twenty- seven Ws eight w's. ing much like another. A few enthusiasts will
seven s's, twenty t's, three u's, six Vs, nine w's, continue to find fascination, Isuppose, and
five x's, five y's, and one z. The four numbers on the right are (by coin- indeed new topics in logology remain to be
cidence) all one greater than those on the left: explored. One can only surmise what devel-
Sceptics may care to verify this assertion, adifference of one i, one /, one t, and one w. opments the future may reveal. Perhaps the
barely credible at first sight. Once you have Cancelling common letters in the two lists magic sentences to come will possess apo-
done so, it will be clear that even magic trans- will leave precisely that: the text on the right tency beside which these early essays in the
lations may depend upon the whim of an in- contains an extra i, I, t, and w. Differences at craft will pale. That is certainly to be ex-
terpreter. the meaning level exactly parallel those at pected.
What is disturbing here is that the two the typographical level. Replacing one list Among many possibilities that will sug-
English autograms, although differing in the with the other is thus an autogram-preserving gest themselves to logophiles is the exten-
number-words they use, exhibit indistin- change. A similar but more complicated pair sion beyond letter-level autograms to those
guishable texts. Or, to put it the other way of lists can be extracted from the previous enumerating every sign employed. There is
around: although identically worded, the example. apoint worth raising in this connection. In
sentences list different numbers of letters. Notice that, despite suggestive associa- the example shown at the start of this article,
Certain minds seem to balk at this confronta- tions, apair of sublists so derived can never the listing of signs uses full names such as
tion with asingle text composed of thirty- comprise true anagrams (they cannot con- "comma" and "hyphen". Seen retrospec-
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 50 IN QUEST OF A PANGRAM (4)

tively, this now seems less expedient than 210007010402010302040 who has seen the machine seems to have
bringing them into line with the letters by re- 10501060207010801090 thought that at root it is "really" acomputer.
producing the sign itself and adding an 's. That is amisunderstanding. The term com-
Differences in British and American usage The 0-convention is admittedly arbitrary, puter is now well established; it refers to a
are among the recommendations for this but even if rationalized it would be hasty to device incorporating a stored program of
change. Strictly speaking, however, quota- suppose these oddities of any mathematical data and instructions. There is nothing in the
tion marks (or points) are demanded in using significance. pangram machine corresponding to acentral
asign as aname for itself. When this is done, Still further contingencies for the future processing unit (cPu), an arithmetic logic
the apostrophe can be dispensed with and we are metamagic autograms in which both unit (Aw), amemory, or aprogram.
arrive at: ". five 'a's, two 'b's, .one words and letters come up for self-enumer- In fact, as Isubsequently discovered, the
twenty-seven ','s, twenty-three"'s, seven '-'s ation. More complicated monsters will pre- machine is acloser cousin to a"mechanical
&, last but not least, two '&'s, for instance. sent themselves to thought. Less fanciful are number sieve" invented by D.H. Lehmer in
This is, Ibelieve, the most natural and for- pairs of mutually-enumerating texts or even the 1920s. His device shares two things in
mally correct method, and Irecommend it as longer loops, although the difficulties these common with mine. One is the basic odome-
anotational standard to be adopted by others. impose should not be underrated. A dyad ter mechanism which sees to it that combi-
The desirability of auniversal system will such as nations of parameters are systematically
be apparent to interested parties. called up for testing. The other is aparallel
Having said that, it is worth noting that The sentence The sentence monitoring system that signals the odometer
the impulse toward sign-enumerating texts on the right on the left to halt only if every parameter simultane-
comes from astriving for completeness. This contains... contains. ously meets acertain (not necessarily iden-
ambition can be fulfilled so long as conven- tical) condition. In Lehmer's apparatus, the
tional signs are treated as the atomic con- can not be handled independently. In effect, former is amotor-driven set of non-concen-
stituents of printed text. Atoms can be split, amagic combination must be found involv- tric parallel gears with holes drilled at special
however, much like hairs. Reductionists will ing twice as many terms. Even so, the second points on their periphery. The monitoring
see the dot over the jas atypographic elec- sentence is astraightforward function of the system is alight beam and photocell arrange-
tron spinning in jeostationary orbit above its first (or vice versa), so that the problem need ment that disconnects the motor when an
nucleus. As such, it will qualify for separate not imply construction of amachine having alignment of holes is detected. The positions
listing. Idealists will insist that ligatures twice as many channels. Ileave it to readers of these holes represent various finite arith-
were made in Heaven, and what God hath to explore the ramifications of this interest- metic solutions to an equation. A combina-
joined may no man tear asunder. Still others ing puzzle. This brings me to afinal word on tion of such cases can yield ageneral solu-
may contemplate descent to more hellish the pangram machine. tion. Note well the condition to be satisfied
levels: Disconcertingly, more than one person here (hole present at acertain location); in

•
•• •• • • ••
••
• • • • • • •
•
••
• • ••
e ••
• • •• •
•• •
•
• ••• Slimmerick*
by Lee Sallows
Perhaps my hesitation in giving an exact def-
inition of the term "autogram" will now be
"Here's aquirky quotation," said Quine, 30
more explicable. On consideration, it is
"That precedes a prediction of mine: 29
probably agood idea to confine use of the 'If alimerick's good 16
expression to normal practice and leave the Then its syllables could 21
subatomicists to invent their own labels. Only add up to be thirty-nine' ..." 23
Aside from practical constraints, the ini-
tial text used in searching for an autogram is Quipped a self-referentialist (Me), 28
the sole determinant of success or failure. "Self-fulfilling is my prophecy: 26
Time was when rambling and even dubious If this limerick ends 18
phrasing passed muster. Kousbroek's pan- As its author intends 18
gram has changed all that; prolix or other- Then its word count will reach twenty-three!" 36
wise suspect formulations can no longer ex-
Answered Quine, ". ..I'd been waiting for you, 32
pect uncritical acclaim. At the other pole,
On discovering letters too few: 26
however, is the prospect of zero-text auto-
For I'd already guessed 19
grams—simple, self-enumerating lists,
Your whole poem's expressed 23
without even the "and" at the end. Since the
In three hundred and seventy-two!! 27
ten non-critical letters are excluded, an in-
ventory of this kind would comprise at most 372
sixteen items. The shortest such list will in a
sense be the ultimate autogram.
Also relevant in this context, though of *"Slimmerik" is Dutch for a "cunning one".
less interest to logophiles perhaps, are self- The first two lines of the poem carry an allusion to the contemporary
enumerating numbers. A digit can never be philosopher WV. Quine's famous rendering of Epimenides' paradox
catalogued as occurring zero times, so "0" "This sentence is false":
can be used as aquotation mark to distin-
guish use from mention. "Yields a falsehood when appended to its own quotation"
yields afalsehood when appended to its own quotation.
9000302020302090
Here the subject of the sentence—the phrase in quotes—is appended to
its own quotation; the resulting sentence is, in fact, aquirky quotation
—that is to say, nine zeros, three twos, two
preceding a prediction that the operation will yield afalsehood. Quine's
threes, and two nines. On analogy with pan- object was to achieve self-reference while avoiding the expression "this
grams, pandigits can be found, too: sentence" which, it has been argued, cannot really refer to anything.

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 GENERAL INTEREST El
the pangram machine the criteria to be met scientists make it clear that Iam very far from have ever been focal concepts. Its name is
(agreement with claimed numbers) are having explored all software approaches; in poetry. Let none suppose that anything but
themselves a function of the parameters. particular, amodified version of the iterative poetry has been our purpose here.
Readers interested in further details of algorithm originally tried is widely regarded
Lehmer's sieve will find an excellent and en- as holding great promise. Leaving aside the This epilogue contains three a's, one h, two c's.
tertaining account in Albert H. Beiler's wager, my warmest encouragement goes out two d's, thirty e's, fourf's, two g's, six h's, ten is.
Recreations in the Theory of Numbers to any who might like to pursue this question. one j, one k, two /'s, one m, twenty-one o's, sev-
(Dover Books). There still remain ahost of pangrams yet to enteen os, two p's, one q. six r's, twenty-seven
be produced in all the languages remaining. s's, twenty-one is, three a's, five l.'s, nine w's, three
Of even keener interest, though, will be to .v's, five y's, and one:.
A challenge learn of any new approaches pioneered.
This article has been reproduced by kind per-
The fact that two people working indepen- mission of Springer-Verlag, Heidelberg and
Closing thoughts New York.
dently on quite different problems should
have evolved closely similar mechanisms An act of magic consists in doing what others
for their solution is remarkable. It suggests believe impossible. Together with magic
that the principle involved may have yet squares and the marvellous tessellations of References
broader application. Indeed, Iwould like Maurits Escher, autograms are among aclass
here to advance the view that the self-arrest- of objects that achieve their magical effect Kousbroek, Rudy. De Logologische
ing odometer technique deserves awider fa- through creating an unbelievable coinci- Ruimte, Amsterdam: Meulenhoff, 1984,
miliarity. There is acertain class of brute- dence.ln the first, the coincidence is between pp. 135-53.
force search for which it is afundamental al- row and column sums; in the second, be- Dewdney, A.K. "Computer Recreations",
gorithmic structure. That is not to say Iam tween figure and ground shapes; in the third, Scientific American, October 1984,
advocating the construction of purpose-built it is between a message and its medium. pp. 18-22.
machines (however enjoyable that might These three are all examples of what Hofstadter, Douglas R. Metamagical
be). My idea is than an electronic combina- Sigmund Freud (of all people) would have Themas, New York: Basic Books, 1985,
tion sequencer, as Ipropose calling it, might called ove, -determined structures—overde- pp. 27-29,845.
easily comprise astandard hardware unit for termined because they embody the simulta- Sallows, L. & Eijkhout, V. "Co-descriptive
integration into a(parallel) computer. This neous satisfaction of independent (sets of) Strings", The Mathematical Gazette,
is not the place to elaborate on the idea. criteria. Vol. 70, No. 451, March 1986,
Suffice it to say that such aunion could com- Of course there is already a discipline pp. 1-10.
bine the speed of the former with the flexi- whose concern is with the creation of overde- Sallows, L. "A New Type of Crossword
bility of the latter to produce auniversal ma- termined textual structures: ahighly techni- Puzzle", The American Mathematical
chine capable of accepting search problems cal field in which the distillation of meaning Monthly, Vol. 94, No. 7, Aug—Sept.
from very different domains. and the coalescence of form with content 1987, p. 666.
The increase in speed that both (a later
version of) Lehmer's device and the pangram
machine show over aconventional computer
is directly attributable to their parallel pro-
cessing. Of course, non-conventional or
"super" computers using parallel processing
also exist. This is worth mentioning since in
Scientific American A.K. Dewdney has
given wide publicity to a remark of mine
which seemed less reckless in its original P-C-B ARTWORK MADE EASY I
context within aletter to Martin Gardner: "I Create Printed Circuit Artwork on your
bet ten guilders 'about three pounds l nobody IBM or Compatible
can come up with aself-enumerating solu- *MENU DRIVEN
tion to the sentence beginning 'This com- *HELP SCREENS
puter-generated pangram contains ...and
*ADVANCED FEATURES
'within the next ten years." Parallel pro-
*EXTREMELY USER FRIENDLY
cessors, Ishould like to emphasize. are ex-
cluded from this wager. *AUTO GROUND PLANES
Human perversity being what it is, not *1X and 2X PRINTER ARTWORK
improbably some will not rest until Ihave *1X HP LaserJet ARTWORK
been made to eat those words (it is incredible
how seriously some people can take such art- *HP and HI PLOTTER DRIVER optional 49.00
less taunts!). Ican only hope arespectable
REQUIREMENTS: IBM PC or Compatible, 384 K RAM
interval will be allowed to elapse before
DOS 3.0 or later. IBM compatible printers.
someone succeeds. In fairness, it must be
said that much of the data contained herein PCBoards - layout program 99.00
could be put to use in greatly narrowing the PCRoute -auto -router 99.00
area of abrute-force search. Frankly. Ihave SuperCAD -schematic pgm. 99.00
often wondered how far one might go in re- DEMO PKG. -10.00
turning to the computer armed with the in-
Call or write for more information
sights and information gleaned via the ma-
PCBoards
chine. Besides this, from the present per-
2110 14th Ave. South, Birmingham, AL 35205
spective it is clear that acooler analysis of
1-800-733-PCBS / (205)933-1122
the problem at the very beginning would
have saved me a great deal of frustration
later. Furthermore, subsequent discussion
with various mathematicians and computer
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 DESIGN IDEAS
The contents of this column are based solely on information supplied by

the author and do not imply practical experience by Elektor Electronics

Advanced input stage for aleft/right revolution counter

by H. Matjaz

M OST left /right revolution counters are

based on ashutter fixed on the axle of
the motor that interrupts two infra-red sen-
sors—see Fig. 1. Whether the counter counts
up or down depends on which IR sensor is
interrupted in the first place. Most construc-
tors connect the IR sensors directly to the
input of the counter. The minimum distance
between the sensors is normally 5mm.
A problem occurs when the motor stops
at the exact moment the shutter is directly
between the two sensors. The motor could
then be turned the other way and the counter
would count, although it should not. The prob-
lem arises, of course, because of the way
the sensors are connected to the counter.
Clearly, an input circuit is required that ob-
viates this and similar problems. The one pro-
posed here counts correctly, irrespective of
how many times the motor changes direc-
tion ar at which angle it stops.

Method of counting

The method of counting is based on the tra-

ditional shutter and two IR sensors as shown
in Fig. I. The counter must count UP when
the sensors are interrupted in the sequence
shown in Fig. 2a. Logic high means that the
sensor is interrupted; logic low that it is not
interrupted.

Mead A »near A

»moor II "moor I

COUNTS UP COUNTS DOWN

90013,, 900133-12b

Fig. 2

Circuit description

The circuit of the input stage is shown in

Fig. 3. When both sensors are not inter-
rupted, the level at A and B is high (+5 V).
When sensor A is interrupted, the level at A
goes low. When sensor B is interrupted, the
level at B goes low. Schmitt triggers Type
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 ADVANCED INPUT STAGE FOR A LEFT/RIGHT REVOLUTION COUNTER El

4093 are used here to ensure that the transi-

tion of the sensor output from high to low or
vice versa is fast enough for the circuit to
operate satisfactorily.
Production of an uP counting CLOCK pulse
Fig. 4 depends on three conditions being met:

• the level at D must be high;

basis *Me
211
elass cumue bolt
• the level at A must be high;
• the level at B must change from low to
11

900133.14

high.

Similarly, production of aDOWN count-

ing CLOCK pulse depends on:
8 - 1

• the level at D being low (that is, the Q

U/0 WA

CLOCK
output of IC 3bis high);
CLOCK

counts UP counts DOWN • the level at B being high;

• the level at A changing from low to high.
A ---1 I A

B r
----- The four possible states are given dia-
Fig. 5 U/6 ,..¿(¿J un5 Malf
grammatically in Fig. 4. Gates IC,, IC d,
CLOCK CLOCK IC 2a ,IC2b, IC2c, IC 3a ,
and IC3b cause the level
not counting ! not counting !
at D to be high only on the transition from
90013,15 state '1' to state '2'. The level at D is low on
A
transition from state '1' to "4'. This means
B
that the ci.1:3érc
- for uP counting is produced
e
da only when sequential transition from state '1'
CLOCK
ir
counts UP to state '4' occurs (1-2-3-4-1). For DOWN
counting, the transition should be 1-4-3-2-1.
Some examples of when counting takes place
or not are given in Fig. 5. Time constants
R5—C 1 and R6—C2 determine the width of
the CLOCK pulse: for instance, if R5 = R6 =
10 k≤ and CI = C2 = 1nF, the width is
10 its.
When u/i5 is high, the counter must count
UP, otherwise DOWN.
The shutter is made of transparent mate-
rial with asector blacked as shown in Fig. 6.
The sector may have various areas, while
the sensors may be placed in anumber of
locations. Two will be discussed.
The size of the shutter sector and the po-
sition of the two sensors in Fig. 6a is suit-
able for devices where the counting UP must
be at the same angle as the counting DOWN
(0 =0). This arrangement would find appli-
cation in, for instance, atransformer wind-
ing system.
The size of the sector and the sensor po-
sitions shown in Fig. 6b are suitable for ap-
plications where the motor has ahigh angu-
lar velocity.
The construction of atypical IR sensor,
the Type H22A1, is shown in Fig. 7, while a
typical application of the input stage is given
H22A1 in Fig. 8.

,1,1
K pnototranststor

IR rimer 900133-17

Fig. 7

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 54

8031 SINGLE BOARD COMPUTER

Intel's 8031 embedded
controller chip contains all
the essential ingredients of
amicrocomputer — I/O
ports, aUART, interrupt
lines, 16-bit timers and
counters, an 8-bit CPU,
and 128 bytes of
RAMstack. All that is
additionally required to
form afully functional
computer is an operating
system, ameans of getting
machine code to the CPU,
afew operating switches
and avisual display. Such
acomputer is described
here.

R. Grodzik

T
HIS project uses the Intel 8031 microcon- tion, the PROM provides the interrupt vec- volt supply present on the board, the 3.6-V
troller to form aself-contained, machine tors for the system. NiCd battery is permanently charged via D3,
code programmable computer board, A major and useful feature of the board is which is forward biased. Resistors R7 and Rs
measuring only 100 x 160 mm. The opera- the provision of battery back-up for the 6264 form apotential divider. The voltage drop
ting system, all 240 bytes of it (probably the static RAM. As shown in the circuit diagram, across Rs drives transistor T2, whose collec-
•
world's smallest...), is contained in a pre- Fig. 2, the RAM supply switching circuit tor voltage is brought low. Via the output of
programmed PROM. The project is aimed in consists of IC6, R6, R7, R8 and D3. With a5- IC6s, alogic low is applied to pin 1of IC6A.
particular at experienced software and hard-
ware designers who want to use the 8031 in
stand-alone application circuits, such as
automated control.

Circuit description
The block diagram of the single board com-
puter, Fig. 1, shows the main elements of the
computer: the 8031 MPU (master processing
unit), 8 KBytes of RAM (random-access
memory), a PROM (programmable read-
only memory) and adata indication based
on two LED displays. A handful of logic ICs
complete the computer.
Port 1(lines P1.0-P1.7) provides eight I/O
lines, (latched input or output), whose logic
status is continuously monitored by an intel-
ligent hexadecimal display. Port 3 (lines
P3.1-P3.4) provides four additional I/O
lines, of which three have adual function of
external interrupt and counter input.
The computer is controlled by the opera-
ting system firmware resident in IC3, a
PROM. The instructions in this PROM en-
able the 8031 to read the data from the serial
input port, and send it to the RAM. In addi- Fig. 1. Block diagram of the single-board computer.
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 8031 SINGLE BOARD COMPUTER 133

3
SV

st

TF
IC5 IC?
STOP
C' XI = 11.059214112 SV
11
X
n ly p

104 18 19 Ç2)0
Vcc
— '`TAL ALE
30 11

39 3 00
9 RST ADO DO
38 5
AD 1 D1 IC2 01
37 7
02
74HC 02
6
AD2
38 8 373 9
AD3 03 03
35 13 12
AD4 04 04
34 IS
15 ADS DS 05
P3.5 33 17 16
ADO 06 06
32 18 19
02 04 S2 AD? 07 07
ONO
red
GO 1111
ICI 10
KI SV
8031 SV
+5V
O
NC 5V
O

4
PIt COUNTER OR I/O 20
O
Vcc BINARY
pli INT IOR I/O 13 19
A8
O P3.3 ASCII
P10 INTO OR 1,0 12 18
P3.2 07 A7
P9 I/0 11 13 17
P3.1 06 IC3* "
P8 1/0 LATCHED 12 16
PI 7 DS PROM AS
P7 I/O LATCHED 7 P1.6 11 5
134 A4
O
P6 I/O LATCHED
PI 5
903 A3
.2
4
O
PS I/O LATCHED 0000 3
o P1.4 02
P4 1,0 LATCHED 7 2
4 PI 3 01 OOFF Al
O
P3 1,0 LATCHED 3 6 1
P1.2 DO AO 4
P2 I/O LATCHED 2 IL
O P1.1 Ei
1
7 1 I/O LATCHED ONO
O P1.0
NC SV
GND 32 13 12 3 2 13 12

14

ro 26 T26

•
3
07 ≥ Al
1
18 1
06 A6
17 5
DS AS
1 8
4 A4
2x HEX DISPLAY 7
15 03 IC4 A3
5V 13 02 6264 a
BCS48 A2

40 12 9
DI SRAM Al
ICS =74HCOO VOS
20 11 10
ICE =74HC32 R2 ONO Do AO
31 10 27
IC? = 74HC32 EA VTR WR
21 25
A8 A8 0100
10 22 24
C.E P3.0 A9
SERIAL DATA 21 1FFF
23
A10 A9
A 10
9600 BAUD K 2 29 24 23
3 Sril
1 A11 All

D1
BC548
17 ,
FTD Al2
25
Al2 a 20 3

22
X ONO
1N4001

5V
9

C10
T
OP
CI CI CI CI. CL

.720n7OnTOTOnT1150nIrOnT5On 12

13 910012 •13

Fig. 2. Circuit diagram of the 8031-based computer. Data downloaded from the PC is shown on two 'intelligent' hex diplay devices connected
to port 1of the 8031.

Pin 2of IC6A remains high when the PROM Programming the computer PC, and then download the final version to
is addressed. Above address OOFFh, one or the computer board at 9600 baud. Even for
more of the inputs of IC7, configured as a These days, most people have access to a the full eight kilobytes, the transfer only
five-input OR-gate, go high, which in turn is personal computer (PC), and with the addi- takes afew seconds.
inverted by IC5c. Next, a'low' is applied to tion of one of many communications soft- The author has deliberately avoided the
pin 2of IC6A; pin 3of IC6A goes low and thus ware utilities available, or, indeed, an 8031 use of Intel-hex or Motorola-s protocols. Ob-
enables RAM IC4, while at the same IC3 is assembler, it is relatively simple to produce ject code can be downloaded in binary or
disabled. machine code and download it via the PC's ASCII format. The binary code is accommo-
When power is removed from the board, serial port to the input of the UART con- dated as byte-wide RS232 transmissions:
diode D3 becomes reversed biased, prevent- tained in the 8031. The code then resides in 8data bits, 1stop bit, no parity, 9600 bits per
ing any current from the battery reaching the the on-board 8 KByte-large battery-backed second. Alternatively, each byte can be
base of T2. Consequently, this transistor re- RAM, which ensures that the downloaded downloaded as two ASCII words: i.e., 2Fh =
mains off, with its collector at battery volt- program will remain intact in the event of 32Ascii followed by 46Ascii. Line feeds, return
age. The output of buffer IC6B (pin 11), is loss of power. This method of programming codes and spaces must not be used in this
therefore high. This propagates through acomputer is particularly attractive because format because the board's operating system
IC6A to pin 20 of IC4, thus disabling the it dispenses with the time-consuming prac- will identify them as invalid codes, and the
RAM. Simultaneously, keep-alive voltage is tice of programming and erasing EPROMs display will start blinking rapidly.
supplied to pins 26 and 28 of IC4 to retain the whilst debugging the software. Here, it is a The board control switches could not be
memory contents. simple matter to re-edit the code on the host simpler: one 'go' and one 'stop' push-button.
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
56
COMPUTERS AND MICROPROCESSORS

Pressing the 'stop' button initialises the com-

puter; the display will indicate '00' when the
system is up and running. The board is now
ready to receive data at its serial port. The
display will twinkle as the data is accepted,
and the last code received will be displayed.
The received data (if ASCII) is converted by
the operating system to machine code (bytes)
and placed from start address 0100h on-
wards in the external memory. It will be clear
that binary code does not require translation,
and may be fed direct to the RAM. The con-
tent of the PROM on the computer board, a
74S472, is given as ahex-dump in Fig. 4.

Memory map and interrupt

vectors
The 8KBbytes of external RAM occupy ad-
dress range 0100h to 1FFFh (see Fig. 3). The
first page, addresses 0000h to OOFFh, is occu-
pied by the PROM. Therefore the maximum
addressable range of the RAM is 7936 bytes
(1F00h).
The three interrupt vectors (from external
interrupts INTO, INT1 and timer 0) point to
addresses at the top of the user RAM:

INTO interrupt vector 1FFD h

TIMER 0interrupt vector 1FFA h
INT1 interrupt vector 1FF7h

At these locations, ajump to the address of

the interrupt service routine is usually
placed, e.g.:

1FFD: 02 02 00 LJ(MP 0200

to jump to address 0200h and service the in-

terrupt request from there. The TIMER 1in-
terrupt is reserved for use by the operating
system and therefore not available for
general programming.
As shown by the memory map of the sys-
tem, Fig. 3, page 0 of the RAM (addresses
0000h-OOFFh) is reserved for use by the oper-
ating system. To execute the program, sim-
ply press the 'go' button. Execution of the
program will commence at address 0100h. Fig. 3. Address map of the system. The first 256 bytes in the address space are reserved for
Connect on an ADC or DAC to the port lines, the firmware PROM that contains the operating system and a number of interrupt vectors.
and there you have it: computer control of The user memory has a size of slightly less than eight kilobytes.
the outside world. Data acquisition, moni-
toring, counting, timing — the list is endless; For binary download operation, strap board, tune into the medium-wave band and
it all depends on you. pin 19 of IC3 to +5 V (pin 20); for ASCII you should hear ahum of microprocessor ac-
downloading, strap pin 19 of IC.3 to 0 V tivity. Placing your finger on the PROM
(pin 10). socket to simulate software will modulate
Construction
Once the discrete components, the crystal the output from the radio. If this does not
Construction of the 8031 computer is fairly and IC sockets have all been soldered into happen, proceed no further, as there is prob-
simple, as relatively few parts are involved. place, check for solder bridges and 'dry ably an open or short on your circuit board.
A double sided PCB is used with special pur- joints'. Use an ohmmeter to check for conti- Investigate and rectify. Next, switch off and
pose 0.8-mm pins for pinning through. nuity between all parts of the circuit. Next, populate the board with the remaining ICs.
These pins are much better than odd bits of apply power (5 V), and with the aid of alogic Power up and check with alogic probe that
thin wire which tend to break or fall through. probe, ensure that the supply voltages and pins 32 up to and including 39 of ICI are
The CMOS displays are static sensitive and 0V potentials are present at the appropriate strobing. If everything is all right, the display
fairly expensive, so use the standard static pins of each IC socket. For example, check reads '00'. If not, recheck everything.
precautions when handling these devices. It IC2 pin 20 (+5 V), and pin 1and pin 10 (both
is recommended to fit the displays and all 0V).
ICs in sockets, which make for easier fault-
Connecting up
Disconnect the power and insert ICI, the
finding. The NiCd battery is secured to the 8031, into its socket. This is where the Data connections to the serial port are via a
PCB with a few drops of two-component author's fault-finding tool, an inexpensive 6-way DIN socket and mating plug. Note
glue. transistor radio, comes in. Power up the that the board is also powered via this DIN
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 8031 SINGLE BOARD COMPUTER IM

COMPONENTS LIST
SPRINTplus listing of file A:8031.prm in device National Semi DN74S472
Resistors:
47K R1
00000: 02 00 CO 02 IF FD FF FF FF FF FF 02 1F FA FF FF
4K7 R2 00010: FF FF FF 02 1F F7 FF FF FF FF FF 02 00 3A FF FF
00020: C2 FO 90 01 00 D2 B5 75 98 50 75 89 20 75 8D FD u Pu u. '
3 10012 R3;R4;R9
00030: D2 8E D2 AF D2 AB 80 FE 80 FC 20 BS 09 75 09 00 u '
8k122 R5 00040: 75 08 DO C2 8E 32 30 98 Fl C2 8E C2 98 ES 99 54 'u. .20 T'
00050: 7F FS 90 12 00 68 10 FO 08 C4 FS 70 D2 FO D2 8E .....
10k12 R6
00060: 32 25 70 FO A3 02 8E 32 F8 54 FO B4 30 02 80 18 '
1 51(116 R7 00070: B4 40 06 C3 E8 94 47 40 02 80 13 E8 B4 40 02 80 [email protected]@ ..... @..
00080: F8 C3 94 37 22 00 00 00 E8 C3 94 3A 40 02 80 OB ' .7"
1 1k125 R8
00090: E8 94 2F 40 06 C3 E8 94 30 80 E9 74 00 FS 90 12
000A0: 00 AB 74 88 F5 90 12 00 AB 80 FO 7E 80 lE 7F FF '..t ........
000BO: IF BF 00 FC BE 00 F6 22 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
Capacitors: 00000: 74 00 FS 90 02 00 20 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF 't
2 log 16V tantalum Cl ;C4 00000: 12 00 AB C2 B5 02 01 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
000E0: FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
bead
000FO: FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
2 33pF C.2:03 00100: 02 00 6B 02 1F FD FF FF FF FF FF 02 IF FA FF FF ' k
00110: FF FF FF 02 IF F7 FF FF FF FF FF 02 00 3A FF FF
7 100nF ceramic C5 — C11
00120: C2 FO 90 01 00 D2 BS 75 98 SO 75 89 20 75 80 FD u Pu. u '
00130: 02 8E D2 AF 02 AB 80 FE 80 FC 20 BS 09 75 09 00 u
00140: 75 08 63 C2 8E 32 30 98 Fl C2 8E C2 98 ES 99 F5 'u.c. 20
Semiconductors: 00150: 90 FO A3 02 8E 32 7E 80 lE 7F FF IF BF 00 FC BE 2-
1 8031 or 80031 Cl 00160: 00 F6 22 12 00 56 C2 B5 02 01 00 74 00 F5 90 02 ..."..V .....
00170: 00 20 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
1 74HC373 IC2 00180: FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
1 PROM 74S472 103 00190: FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
001A0: FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
(see note) 00180: FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
1 6264 IC4 001CO: FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
001DO: FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
1 741-1000 'CS 001E0: FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
2 74HC32 106;107 001FO: FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
91WU-U
2 1N4148 Dl;D3
2 B0548 Tl;T2
2 LED (1 green, 1red) D2;D4 Fig. 4. Hexdump of the firmware PROM, a type 74S472.
Miscellaneous:
2 keyboarc rocker switch S1;S2 socket. At the host computer end, connect a Intel, detailing the programming of the 8031:
with indicator (RS 319-843) single screened cable to the ground and TXD
1 11.0592 MHz quartz crystal X1 pins of the serial port. Also tie the RTS and (1) Intel 8-bit Embedded Controller Hand-
1 16-way IDC box header K1 CTS pins together. book (1989) (RS code 910-749);
1 PCB-mounting 6-way K2 All the port I/O, interrupt, and power lines (2) Intel Embedded Controller Applications
DIN socket
of the 8031 computer are brought out to a16- Handbook (RS code 910-777);

41
1 3V6 NiCd battery
way IDC pin header (Ki), for connection via
08-mm pcb pins
ribbon cable to peripheral devices. As shown These books, and data sheets on the 8031, are
in the photograph of the prototype, the pin available from
Note:
header is a box type connector with eject Intel Literature Sales •P.O. Box 7641 •Mt.
The pre-programmed PROM and the PCB
headers. Prospect •IL 60056-7641 •USA.
artwork for this project are available from:
or, in the UK, from
R. Grodzik •53 Chelmsford Road •BRAD-
Intel Corporation (UK) Ltd. •Pipers Way •
FORD BD3 80N •ENGLAND. The price of For further reading Swindon •Wilts SN3 1RJ. Telephone: (0793)
the PROM is £15.00 including P&P.
Various publications are available from 696000.

SLIDE POTENTIOMETERS IN THE VIDEO MIXER AN UPDATE

We understand that the mounting of the
slide potentiometers in the video mixer pub-
lished last year has caused asmall difficulty
with some constructors.
There appear to be two types of slide
potentiometer around, which, although they
have the same track length, are mounted dif-
ferently. In some cases, the type with two
mounting lugs (Fig. 1) requires a few wa-
shers, or short PCB spacers, to be positioned
at the right height above the PCB. The sec-
ond type (Fig. 2) has two holes through the
potentiometer body. To enable this type to be
secured to the PCB, mount two small sup-
port plates and two spacers at the track side
of the PCB, as shown in Fig. 2. The length of
the spacers is determined by the required
height of the slide potentiometer above the
PCB surface.

"Video Mixer", Elektor Electronics January,

February and March 1990.
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 58

SWR METER FOR

1.5-70 MHz
Waste not, want not! Radio amateurs are abreed
of electronics enthusiasts who like to see every
milliwatt of their precious RF power arriving where
it belongs: at the antenna terminals. However,
budgets being what they are (RF plugs and
low-loss coax cable are pretty expensive...),
impedance mismatches occur readily between the
transmitter and the aerial, causing power
reflection. The low-cost instrument described here
will tell hams operating in the 160 m through 4m
bands the ratio of the forward to the reflected RF
power.

J. Bareford

A standing-wave ratio (SWR) meter is an

indispensable RF power monitoring
transmission. In this way, hams protect their
precious RF amplifiers from going up into
the term 'power' may be replaced by 'volt-
age'. Thus, in a transmission line system
instrument found in almost any radio ama- smoke owing to agross mismatch, afaulty where amismatch exists, we have aforward
teur's shack. It is often connected perma- coax relay, or atotally absent antenna con- voltage, UF, and areflected voltage, UR. This
nently between the transmitter/receiver rig nection. During the transmission, hams have allows the SWR to be determined from
and the coax cable to the antenna. During one eye on the tuning scale, and the other on
transmissions, it provides arelative indica- the needle of the moving-coil meter in the SWR — UF+UR
tion of the transmitted power, as well as an SWR instrument. Just for reassurance? No, a UF—UR
indication of the ration of the forward RF must to ensure the best possible signal at the
power (i.e., the power fed to the antenna) to receiving station.
the reflected RF power (i.e., the power re-
flected into the transmitter owing to amis- From this, it is seen that an SWR of 1corre-
Standing-wave ratio
match at some point in the transmission sponds to optimum matching of the trans-
line). The ratio of the forward RF power to the re- mitter to the coax and antenna system. That
Since most radio amateurs have several flected RF power is called the standing-wave is not to say that there are no losses: it only
transmitters and antenna systems, it is good ratio, or SWR. Since, in the actual SWR means that the transmitter output is
operating practice to check the antenna meter, we are working with one, definitely matched to the load impedance formed by
match at alow power level, before starting a established, transmission line impedance, the transmission line, which includes the
aerial, i.e., the load at the far end of the cable.
In fact, the effect of an improperly matched
antenna becomes smaller as the attenuation
on the cable rises. This is because both the
forward and the reflected power are subject
to the same attenuation. A good discussion
of the relative importance of the SWR is
found in Ref. I. Incidentally, long runs of
lossy coax cable often form the perfect
dummy load: any length of (matched) coax
cable that introduces an attenuation of more
than, say, 20 dB at the test frequency, will re-
flect so little power that it looks like aperfect
resistance to the transmitter (keep an eye on
the dissipation, though!).
Typical, tolerable, SWR values resulting
from small mismatches are in the range from
1.5 to 2.0. Most radio amateurs would agree
that an SWR greater than 2is adefinite cause
for investigating the mismatch, as then more
than 11% of the transmitted power is
'wasted' by reflection. The cause of the mis-
Fig. 1. Circuit diagram of the SWR meter. The RF energy produced by the transmitter is match may be found in an incorrectly tuned
coupled capacitively via C1, and inductively via L1 to establish the ratio of the forward to the RF amplifier, apiece of coax with the wrong
reflected power.
impedance (the notorious 50/75-e prob-
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 59
SWR METER FOR 1.5 —70 MHz

lem), birds on your aerial, a frozen-over Construction

aerial, the hectic of acontest, water in your
coax cable, or acouple of faulty RF connec- The layout of the double-sided printed cir-
tors somewhere on your attic or on the roof. cuit board is shown in Fig. 2. Be sure to avoid
Whatever the cause, make sure you elemi- overheating the trimmer, C2, while soldering
nate it before starting to transmit, since many its terminals. As shown in the photograph in
RF amplifiers, particularly those used for Fig. 3, the two BNC sockets are connected by
SSB (single-sideband) and other linear ashort length of thin 50-Q coaxial cable, of
modes, do not like output mismatches, and which the screening braid is connected to the
produce an excessively wide output spec- socket and the board at the antenna side
trum, causing splatter in the band and an- only. In the prototype, the coax cable was a
noyance to your fellow hams in the 40-mm long piece of RG174U, which has an
neighbourhood. outside diameter of about 3mm.
The winding data of the two inductors in
the instrument, Li and L2, are as follows:
The circuit
Pick-up inductor Li:
The circuit diagram of the present SWR Wind 30 turns of 0.2-mm dia (SWG36;
meter is conventional, see Fig. 1. The for- AWG34) enamelled copper wire on aFf 37-
ward and reflected powers induce RF volt- 43 ferrite ring core from Amidon Associates
ages in a toroid inductor, Li, which is Inc. An alternative core is the FB 43-2401.
positioned around a short length of coax Distribute the wire evenly on the core. Care-
cable. Note that the cable is grounded at one fully remove the enamel coating at the ends.
side of the instrument only (a coax cable Put the coax cable through the hole in the
grounded at both ends does not radiate). core, and solder the wire ends of the inductor
The RF voltage supplied by the transmit- to the holes marked 'Ll' on the PCB. Connect
ter is capacitively coupled via Ci to serve as the coax cable to the BNC sockets as indi-
a kind of reference against which the for- cated above.
ward and reverse powers are measured. The Choke L2:
coupling capacitor is connected to a tuned This is made from 6 turns of 0.2 mm dia.
circuit, L2-L3-C3-C2, that serves to balance (SWG36; AWG34) enamelled copper wire
the measurement circuit at higher frequen- through a 3-mm long ferrite bead. After
cies (in the 6 m band and possibly the 4 m winding the inductor, carefully remove the
band also). enamel coating at the ends, and solder the
The forward and reflected voltages are device in place.
rectified by two diodes, Di and D2, to estab- The completed printed circuit board fits in
lish the relative powers and thus the SWR. an Eddystone or Hammond diecast enclo-
The AA119s used are low-capacitance point- sure of about 11x6x3 cm. The size of the rec-
contact germanium diodes with alow thre- tangular clearance in the lid of the enclosure
shold voltage of about 0.2 V. A toggle switch, depends on the meter you use. The lid is Fig. 2. Double-sided, not through-plated
Si, allows the user to select a(relative) for- drilled to accept the threaded shafts of the printed circuit board for the SWR meter.
ward power indication, or reflected power sensitivity control potentiometer and the for-
relative to forward power. ward/reflected power switch. The connec-

Resistors:
2 1500 Rl;R2
2 1k12 R3;R4
1 100k12 linear potentiometer P1

Capacitors:
1 12pF Cl
1 40pF trimmer Cl
1 82pF C3
2 lOnF C4;05

Semiconductors:
2 AA119 Dl ;D2
2 1N4148 D3;D4

Inductors (see text):

1 FT37-43 (Amidon) L1
1 3-mm ferrite bead L2
1 560µH L3
enamelled copper wire 0.2 mm dia.

Miscellaneous:
1 miniature SPDT switch Si
1 100µA moving-coil meter MI
2 BNC socket Kl;K2
1 diecast enclosure, e.g.. Hammond
type 15906
Fig. 3. A look inside the prototype. Note that the toroid core, Li, is fitted around the 3-mm
dia. coax cable connected between the input and output BNC sockets.
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
60
RADIO AND TELEVISION

tions between the board and the external

components are shown in Fig. 4.

Test and practical use

Connect the completed SWR meter between
a short-wave transmitter and a load you
know to be non-reflective, e.g., a dummy
load of the appropriate impedance and
power rating. Transmit at acontinuous out-
put power. If the indications of forward and
reflected power appear to be reversed, swap
the terminals of Li, or change the lettering of
the switch on the instrument.
If you work in the short-wave bands only,
there is probably no need to adjust the bal-
ance trimmer, Cz. If you do work at 50 MHz
or 72 MHz (UK only), connect adummy load
to the output of the SWR meter, and adjust
the trimmer for minimum reflected power
indication while transmitting at arelatively
low power.
Use the SWR meter as follows after mak-
ing any change to your rig or antenna sys-
tem: transmit at a continuous level, select
forward power, and adjust the sensitivity
control, Pi, for full meter deflection. Next,
switch to reflected power. The higher the in
the worse your antenna match. •

Reference:
1. "Losses encountered when interconnect-
ing cables having the incorrect impedance".
by Dr. P. Brumm, DL7HG. VHF Communica-
tions issue 3/1974. Fig. 4. Where to connect the external components.

DUAL 70 MHz CMOS VIDEO

AMPLIFIER
ELECTRONICS SCENE
•51/ -5V

1, rectly down 75 SI cables, or down back-

terminated 75 S2 cables. Other applica-
tions include driving flash converters,
Quality Instruments
and providing output buffers for cross- for RF Power Measurement
point switches such as the MAX456.
Isolation between the two amplifiers
tlVp-p
OUTPUTS
INTO 750
is guaranteed to be greater than 60 dB.
The MAX452 single version of this am-
plifier can be used in' applications requir-
ing even greater isolation.
Maxim Integrated Products •120 San
Gabriel Drive •Sunnyvale •CA 94086.
Telephone: (408) 737-7600.
>eitimia
Maxim Integrated Products introduces
the MAX457, a monolithic IC compris-
ing two 70 MHz CMOS video amplifiers
which can drive 75 S2 loads. These am- low-power, multi-power, and low-frequency

II
plifiers operate from ±5 V supplies, and BIRD FULL-LINE CATALOG models), the catalog presents calorimeters,
together consume only 350 mW. The OF MEASURING EQUIPMENT plug-in elements, line sections, QC-Connec-
only necessary external components are Bird Electronic Corp. has released its tors, RF loads, attenuators, switches, direc-
two resistors for gain setting, and two
60-page full-line catalog of RF power meas- tional couplers, and accessories from 50(1
decoupling capacitors.
uring equipment and accessories. It also adapters to carying cases.
Without external compensation, these
includes hundreds of photos and detailed The catalog is available at no charge to
amplifiers are stable at again of 1when
driving 75 S2 loads, and stable at a gain descriptions, specifications, and ordering qualified service establishments, laborato-
of 2 when driving 150 12 loads. This information. ries, RF engineers, and buyers from Bird
makes the MAX457 ideally suited to buf- In addition to the wattmeters' line (includ- Electronic Corp., 30303 Aurora Rd., Solon,
fering video signals for transmission di- Mg high accuracy, peak reading, high-power, OH 44139, (216) 248-1200.
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 61

WORLD SATELLITE TV
AND SCRAMBLING METHODS NEW BOOKS FAULT DIAGNOSIS OF
DIGITAL CIRCUITS
By Franklin Baylin, Richard Maddox and By V.N. Yarmolik
John McCormac ISBN 0-471-92680-9
ISBN 0-917893-11-5 stallation, and testing. Chapter 3has an ex- 198 pages—illustrated
342 pages-illustrated cellent introduction to transmission line Price $64.95 (hardcover)
Price $39.95 + $2 shipping technology, covering signal reflections, cable The complexity of digital components places
World Satellite TV and Scrambling Methods is losses, the choice of coax cable, line ampli- more stringent requirements on their reliabil-
amust for anyone interested in satellite tele- fication, and minimum signal levels specified ity. This problem may be improved by amix
vision technology and scrambling systems. by FCC regulations. Chapter 6discusses test of technological, maintenance, and organiza-
The authors have explored all components and measurement procedures, providing de- tional measures. Because of their diversity,
of home satellite systems from the point of tails of the function of video insertion test technical diagnostic techniques for digital
view of atechnician who must understand (VIT) lines and notes on how to carry out such computer components are exceptional. One
their design, operation, and repair. tests and interpret the results. method is on-line testing. Its application at
It complements the third edition of Ku- Although the subtitle indicates HDTV the stage of component manufacturing lets
band Satellite TV-Theory, Installation and systems are discussed, little information is you determine if their behavior is correct and,
Repair and the popular The Home Satellite TV provided on this subject, probably because if incorrect, lets you perform the fault loca-
Installation and Troubleshooting Manual, also the five standards agreed by the CCIR dur- tion procedure, which improves the basic
published by Baylin. Circuit and block dia- ing the 17th Plenary Assembly last May were reliability parameters (availability, mainte-
grams of most components are clearly ex- not known when the book was written. How- nance, and servicing).
plained throughout the book. ever, its depth of information provides asolid This book is important to the many engi-
Nearly one-third of the book is devoted to basis for the practical implementation of neers, technologists, and scientists engaged
a detailed study of broadcast formats (in- HDTV signals on future systems. in digital engineering. It should also be of in-
cluding NTSC, PAL, SECAM, and MAC), Cable Television Technology and Operations terest to seniors and post-graduate students
digital techniques, as well as basic scram- is a useful, if not essential, desk-and-field focusing on electrical engineering.
bling and encryption methods. This material reference work for all cable TV technical John Wiley & Sons Ltd.
is abackdrop to adiscussion of all current staff: system engineers and designers, opera- 605 Third Ave.
American and European satellite TV technol- tors, installers, and managers. New York, NY 10158-0012
ogies, including the VideoCipherII, RITC, McGraw Hill Book Company
IRDETO, Oak Orion, Filmnet, Sky Channel, Princeton Rd.
EuroCipher, B-MAC, D2-MAC, VideoCrypt, Hightstown, NJ 08520
and Teleclub Payview III systems. DIGITAL TELEVISION
The preceding information is aprelude to Edited by C.P. Sandbank
the chapters on troubleshooting and setting ISBN 0-471-92360-5
up atest bench. Throughout the text, expert ISDN EXPLAINED 656 pages—illustrated
By John M. Griffiths Price $180 (hardcover)
guidance on testing, servicing, and tuning is
complemented by more than 200 photos, ISBN 0-471-92675-2 Digital signal processing applied to television

diagrams, tables, and wiring schematics. 175 pages—illustrated technology has increased the capability of
Price $42.95 (hardcover) program-making facilities and improved
Baylin Publications
1905 Mariposa ISDN Explained is an authoritative and highly recording and transmission. It is an essential

Boulder, CO 80302 reliable guide to the Integrated Service Digital technology for high-definition television

(303) 449-4551, FAX (303) 939-8720 Network (ISDN), an exciting new telecom- receivers.
munications development that will revolu- Digital Signal Processing describes the his-
tionize the way businesses operate. torical background, technical development,
The ISDN will provide customers with a international standards, current applications,

CABLE TELEVISION totally digital network and will enable voice, and future prospects of this new technology.
TECHNOLOGY AND OPERATIONS video, and data to be carried on the telephone No other book (as yet) covers the entire field
By Eugene R. Bartlett network at very fast transmission speeds over of digital electronics in broadcasting televi-
ISBN 0-07-003957-7 asingle line. This paves the way not only for sion. Apart from the engineering and techno-
425 pages—illustrated improvements in existing services but also logical side of digital television broadcasting,
Price $34.75 (hardcover) for the development of new applications. the book also describes in detail digital video
Even though cable TV systems represent a The book provides aconcise introduction tape recording, telecine and cameras, and
multi-million dollar market, few technicians to all aspects of the subject. It covers the digital video interfaces.
have at least abasic knowledge of their design evolution of networks and terminals and dis- In view of the importance of the new tech-
and operation. Although Cable Television cusses the nature of interfaces—how termin- nology and the comprehensive way Digital
Technology and Operations is aimed at entry als interact with the network. Television deals with all aspects of this vast
level cable TV technicians, it should also John Griffiths and the other contributing field, it is the ideal book for all broadcasting
prove useful as areference for those familiar authors represent acenter of excellence and engineers and for students and teachers of
with the subject. This is due to the emphasis knowledge in this field, and their book is electronics/television engineering looking for
on elementary background and the abun- therefore important to all involved in tele- an authoritative, comprehensive, and up-to-
dance of reference material. communications engineering. date coverage of digital television.
The book covers everything related to cable John Wiley & Sons Ltd. John Wiley & Sons Ltd.
TV systems—from the power supply to the 605 Third Ave. 605 Third Ave.
cable termination, including planning, in- New York, NY 10158-0012 New York, NY 10158-0012
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
400-watt laboratory power frequency, and not once every five cycles. DVMs for the voltage/current indication,
supply The problem is best solved by reducing the their ground line must be connected to the
amplification of the regulation circuit. Re- positive terminal of C12.
October 1989 and November 1990 place R17 with a39 kIl resistor, and create
A number of constructors of this popular feedback by fitting it between the base and
project have brought the following problems the collector of T3. Also add a resistor in
Hard disk monitor
to our attention. series with the optocoupler. These two December 1989
1. The onset point of the current limit cir- changes are illustrated in Figs. 1 and 2. In some cases, the circuit will not reset
cuit lies at about 3A, which is too low. Solve Lower R16 to 10 kfl, increase C24 to 10 µF., properly because the CLEAR input of IC3A is
this problem by replacing Ti with a Type and increase R15 to 270 ka erroneously connected to ground. Cut the
BC517 darlington transistor, and R20 with a 3. Excessive heating of the transformer is ground track to pin 3of IC3, and use ashort
82kS1 resistor. caused by ad.c. component in the primary wire to connect pin 3to pin 16 (+5 V).
2. Depending on the current transfer ratio winding. This is simple to remedy by fitting
of the optocoupler used, the transformer acapacitor of any value between 47 nF and
produces ticking noises. This effect, which is 470 nF, and avoltage rating of 630 V, across Microprocessor-controlled
caused by overshoot in the pre-regulation the primary connections. This capacitor is telephone exchange
circuit, may be traced with the aid of an os- conveniently mounted on to the PCB termi-
cilloscope monitoring the voltage across C26 nal block that connects the transformer to the October 1990
at a moderate load current. The capacitor mains. In some cases, the timing of the signals ap-
must be charged at each cycle of the mains 4. One final point: when using LED plied to IC17 causes alatch-up in the circuit,
so that the exchange does not detect the state
of the connected telephones properly. Solve
this problem by cutting the track to pin 1of
IC17, and connecting pin 1to ground (a suit-
able point is the lower terminal of C6).
The text on the fitting of wires on the
BASIC computer board (page 19, towards
the bottom of the right-hand column) should
be modified to read:'Finally, connect pin 6of
K2 to pin 7of IC3 (Y7 signal):

S-VHS/CVBS-to-RGB
converter (2)
October 1990
The capacitor marked 'C37', next to R21 on
the component overlay (Fig. A) and ready-
made printed circuit board), should be
marked 'C39'.
In case they are difficult to obtain locally,
inductors type 119-LN-A3753 (Li) and 119-
LN-A5783 (L2) may be replaced with the re-
spective types 119-ANA-5874HM and
119-ANA-5871HM, also from Toko, Inc.
Suggested suppliers are Cirkit Distribution
Ltd., and C-I Electronics.

EPROM simulator
December 1989
Counters IC3 and IC4 may not function
properly owing to atoo low supply voltage.
This problem may be solved by replacing
IC12 with a 7806. Alternatively, use BAT85
diodes in positions D1 and D2.

Programmer for the 8751

November 1990
The ready-programmed 8751 for this project
is available at £35.25 (plus VAT) under order
number ESS 7061, not under order number
ESS 5951 as stated on the Readers Services
pages in the November and December 1990
issues.
WorldRadioHistory
El .EKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 CORRECTIONS 63

CTIONalm ebLRIZILLIaNS Ce
Medium-power A.F. amplifier ing capacitors in the symmetrical power nent mounting plan are given in Fig. 3to as-
supply section of the amplifier was designed sist readers in producing this PCB, which is
October and November 1990 after publication of Part 2of this project. The not available ready-made. 3
A circuit board to accommodate the smooth- track layout (mirror image) and the compo-

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
64

INTERVAL CONTROL FOR CAMCORDERS AN UPDATE

T
HE original design of an interval control
for camcorders (Ref. 1) works with cam-
corders that are switched on when the REC-
ORD switch is pressed, and off when the
switch is released. However, there are also
types with atoggle function of the RECORD
switch. These are switched on when the
RECORD switch is pressed, and off when the
same switch is pressed again.
To allow the control to be used with the
latter type of camcorder, the original circuit
must be fitted with the extension shown in
Fig. 1. The extension is inserted between ter-
minals X and Y as indicated in Fig. 2. The
track layout and component mounting plan
in Fig. 3show where to create terminals X
and Y on the PCB.
With some camcorders, the proposed ex-
tension has one disadvantage: after switch-
ing on the camcorder, you are not sure
whether it records or not when LED D4
flashes. If this problem occurs, make ahabit
of pressing the RECORD switch once, to
make sure that the LED flashes when the
camcorder is recording. •

Reference:
"Interval control for camcorders", Elektor
Electronics March 1990.

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 65

ORDER FORM
TELEPHONE DIME OMENS
READERS SERVICES OLD COLONY SOUND LAB (603) 824-4371, 924-6526

All orders, except for subscriptions, should be PO BOX 243

PETERBOROUGH, Nil 83458 FAX: (603) 824-9447, 24 beers
Answerbp usaddie before 9 a.m.,

sent to Old Colony Sound Lab: by mail to PO

Box 243, Peterborough NH 03458-0243; Visa/ CUSTOMER ADDRESS SHIPPING ADDRESS IF DIFFERENT
MasterCard charge orders by FAX to (603)
924-9467 (24 hours) or by voice 8-4 weekdays NAME NAME
to (603) 924-6526 or 6371. Please use the form
opposite for all orders. All prices are postpaid STREET 8 NO COMPANY
to customers in the fifty states except for books.
Please add $1.75 for the first book and 50e CITY STATE ZIP STREET á NO
for each additional book ordered. Cana-
dians please add $4.50 US for the first MAGIC NUMBER (FROM SUBSCRIPTION LABEL) CITY STATE ZIP
book, and 50C for each additional one
Canadians may expect Canadian duty charges PAYMENT METHOD FOR CHARGE CARD ORDERS UNDER $10, PLEASE ADD $2.
on shipments of any items except books and
subscriptions. D CHECK D MONEY ORDER U MASTERCARD Ill VISA
SUBSCRIPTIONS
CARD NUMBER EXPIRES /
Subscriptions can be provided anywhere in the
United States and its territories as well as AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE DAYTIME PHONE
Canada by sending mail subscriptions to Elektor
Electronics USA, PO Box 876, Peterborough NH
03458-0876. Visa/MasterCard orders may be
Qty. Part Number and Description Price Total
telephoned directly to (603) 924-9464 between
8 and 4 on business days and to our machine
recorders at other hours and on weekends.
Orders may be FAXed at any time to (603)
924-9467. Subscription rates: $28 per year (11
issues); $50, 2years. Student Rate to full-time
registered students, $15 per year (photocopy of
student ID required).

LETTERS
Letters commenting on articles appearing in
Elektor Electronics USA or concerning amatter
of general interest in any field of electronics
should be addressed to the Editor. Publication
is at the discretion of the Editor and all letters
will be subject to prior editing and/or shorten-
ing for publication.

PAST ISSUES
Previous issues of editions published elsewhere
are not available.
CALL OR WRITE FOR YOUR FREE OLD COLONY CATALOG!
PAST ARTICLES
Photocopies of articles from January 1979 on- Please supply the following: For PCBs, front panel foils, EPROMs, and cas- SUBTOTAL
ward are available from Old Colony Sound Lab
for $5 each (multi-part articles: $5 per part); $6
settes, state the part number and description; for books, state the full title; for SHIPPING
in Canada. Indexes are available. Send a photocopies of articles, state full name of the article and month and year of
stamped (50e), self-addressed business-size publication. Please use block capitals. TOTAL
envelope to Old Colony, at the address above,
for EACH YEAR desired. A complete set of in
dexes for 1979-90 is available for $7.50 postpaid. EPROMS/PALSIMICROCONTROLLERS DISKETTES PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS-Continued

PROJECT No. Price Issue PROJECT No. Price Issue PROJECT No. Price
TECHNICAL OUERIES
$ $
Although we are always prepared to assist SEPTEMBER 1990
Intelligent time 553 20.00 2/88 Digital model train 109 11.50 2-5,7/89-
readers in solving difficulties they may ex- High current hFE tester 900078 11.00
standard (1 x 4/90
perience with projects that have appeared in 904085/86 3.50
2764) Logic analyzer for 111 20.00 10/89 Infrared remote
Elektor Electronics USA, we regret that these control
I/O extension card 561 17.50 6-7/88 Atari ST (b/w only)
cannot, under any circumstances, be dealt with
for IBM Computer-controlled 113 20.00 10/89
by telephone or FAX. OCTOBER 1990
(1 x PAL 16L8) Teletext decoder
Guitar tuner 900020 Not Amt.
COMPONENTS Centronics 562 17.50 10/88 /88
/89
Plotter
FAX interlace,
driver IBM 117
119 11.50
14. 00 FP-controlled telephone 900081 36.00
interlace PCs 5-6
6:90
Components for projects appearing in Elektor exchange
for slide fader
Electronics USA are usually available from ap- Medium power audio 900098 18.00
(1 x PAL 16R4) RAM extension for 123 10.00
propriate advertisers in this magazine. If you amplifier
FP-controlled radio 564 20.00 7-9/89 BBC-B
have difficulty finding parts, please send aself- Tuned UHF TV preamp Nei avail.
synthesizer EPROM simulator 129 11.50 12/89
addressed postcard listing the parts you desire Dubbing mixer EV7000 Not aval.
(1 x 27C64) RS-232 splitter 1411 11.50 4/90
and we will attempt to locate a source. If dif- S-VHS/CVBS-to-RGB 900055 24.50
Portable MIDI 567 20.00 11/88 Centronics 1421 11.50 5/90
ficulties in the supply of components are en- converter
keyboard ADC/DAC
visaged, asource will normally be advised in the Phase meter 896056 Not axai.
(1 x 2764) Transistor 1431 13.00 5/90
article. characteristic plot-
Pitch control for 568 20.00 12/88 NOVEMBER 1990
CD players ting (Atari ST b/w) 400W lab power 900082 22.00
BOOKS
(1 x 2764) ROM-copy for 1441 13.00 9/90 supply
The following Elektor books are currently avail- BASIC
MIDI control unit 570 20.00 6-7/90 Active mini subwoofer 900122-1 12.00
able from Old Colony Sound: 8751 programmer 1471 13.00 11/90 Dubbing mixer EV7000 Not avail.
(1 x 27C64)
301 Circuits $12.50 Digital model train 572 20.00 2-5,7/89- PT100 thermometer 1481 13.00 11/90 Medium power audio 900098 18.00
302 Circuits $12.50 (1 x 2764) 4/90 amplifier
303 Circuits $15.95 Darkroom clock 583 18.50 2/90 Programmer for 8751 900100 14.00
Data Sheet Book 2 $16.50 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
(1 x 27128) PT100 thermometer 900106 10.00
Data Sheet Book 3 $17.95 PROJECT No. Price
Video mixer 5861 20.00 1-4/90 Digital capacitance 900123 Not aye
Microprocessor Data Book $17.90 $
(1 x 2764) meter
Four-sensor 5921 20.00 6/90 MAY 1990 TDA7330 car radio 900046 Not avail
FRONT PANEL FOILS Acoustic temperature UPBS-1 4.00
sunshine recorder booster
PROJECT No. Price Issue monitor
(1 x 27128)
Budget sweep/function 900040 14.00 DECEMBER 1990
Slave indication 700 30.00 3/88
All solid-state 890170-F1 33.50 12/89 generator Active mini subwoofer 900122-2 10.50
unit for I.T.S.
preamplifier 890170-F2 18.50 1/90 Centronics ADC/DAC 900037D 30.50 Droitwich time standard 900110 tlot Avad
(1 x874811)
LF/HF signal 890183-F 18.50 12/89 Transistor characteristic 900058 9.50 Milliohmmeter 910004 10.00
EPROM emulator 701 30.00 12/89
tracer plotting Phase check for 900114-1/2 16.00
(1 x 8748H)
Video mixer 87304-F 33.00 1-4/90 audio systems
Microcontroller 702 95.00 5,6,9/88 JUNE 1990
meter 900031-F 23.00 4/90 Signal suppressor for 904024 7.50
driven power Electronic load 900042 24.00
Budget sweep/ 900040-F 20.00 5/90 all solid-state preamp
supply simulator
1unction "Bath full" indicator 904062 Not Avail
x 8751) Mini EPROM viewer 900030 36.00
generator Wideband UHF 904079 Not Avail
Autonomous I/O 704 95.00 12/88 Power zener diode UPBS-1 4.00
High current 900078-F 28.00 9/90 amplifier
controller
hFE tester JULY-AUGUST 1990 C64 A-D/D-A card 904066 Not Avail
(1 x 8751)
400W lab 900082-F 35.00 10-11/90 Compact 10A power 900045 23.00 Audio input selector 904039 12.50
8751 programmer 5951 95.00 11/90
power supply supply Search time monitor 904052 8.00
(1 x8751)
Intermediate projects UPBS-1 4.00 Logic tester 904083 Not Avail
Mini FM transmitter 896118 8.50
JANUARY 1991
Sound demodulator for 900057 7.50 900094-4 18.00
Logic analyzer (1)
satellite-TV receivers
BE SURE TO SEE OUR MASTER LIST Audio power indicator 904004 7.50
bus board
900013 Not avail
SWR meter
OF PRODUCTS ON PAGE 71! Four-monitor driver
for PCs
904067 10.50

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
66

TERMS OF BUSINESS
PRICING next day or second day). UPS requires astreet ad- of the material if originally defective or damaged in
Prices, except as noted, include shipping in the con- dress. If you cannot receive UPS delivery, please in- transit.
tinental USA. The minimum order is $10. A $2 ser- clude an extra $2 for insured service via Parcel Post.
vice charge will be added to orders of less than $10. We cannot accept responsibility for safety or delivery PATENTS
Prices are subject to change as our costs change. WE of uninsured Parcel Post shipments. Absolutely no Patent protection may exist in respect of circuits,
RESERVE THE RIGHT TO MAKE PRICE CHANGES COD shipments. devices, components, and so on described in our
WITHOUT NOTICE. books or magazines. Elektor Electronics USA does not
BOOKS, RECORDINGS, CDs, and SOFTWARE accept responsibility or liability for failing to iden-
ORDERING The shipping/handling charge is $1.75, plus 50e each tify such patent or other protection.
Please use the ORDER FORM provided and include additional item. No returns. According to the Con-
part number, quantity and price. Please print clearly necticut Dept. of Revenue Services, Regulation #27, COPYRIGHT
and include your Magic Number if you are a sub- Section 12-426-27, in order to sell software to resi- All drawings, photographs, articles, printed circuit
scriber. Please include aZIP code in your address. dents of Connecticut, we must register with the boards, EPROMs, software, and cassettes published
The ORDER FORM is designed to help us quickly department as well as collect taxes for the state from in our books or magazines (other than in third-party
and accurately process your order. We reserve the the purchaser. We regret to inform our customers that advertisements) are copyright and may not be repro-
right to refuse mail orders not made using the ORDER we will not sell software to anyone from Connecticut, duced or transmitted in any form or by any means,
FORM or orders under the 10 minimum. as it will prove to be too costly and burdensome. including photocopying and recording, in whole or
TELEPHONE ORDERS in part, without the prior permission of Elektor Elec-
OVERSEAS ORDERS
Telephone orders are welcome between the hours of tronics USA in writing. Such written permission must
For orders to be shipped outside North America, add
9:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m. EST, Monday-Friday. Orders also be obtained before any part of these publications
20% to the total order to cover shipping.
for parts are to be made on the ORDER FORM pro- is stored in a retrieval system of any nature.
vided. Payment for telephone orders is by MC/VISA RETURNS Notwithstanding the above, printed circuit boards
only. Our TELEPHONE ORDER NUMBER IS (603) If you wish to return all or part of an order for any may be produced for private and personal use without
924-6371 or 924-6526. Our answering machine for reason, please call or write first. If we are in error, prior permission.
MCI VISA orders during non-business hours is (603) correction will be made promptly, without charge.
924-6371. FAX: (603) 924-9467 (24 hours). If the error is not ours, adjustment will be made LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
at our discretion. We will send you a return au- Elektor Electronics USA shall not be liable in contract,
PAYMENT
thorization label. A restocking fee of 20% will be tort, or otherwise, for any loss or damage suffered
All remittances MUST BE IN US FUNDS. Payment
charged on returns. Merchandise considered not fit by the purchaser whatsoever or howsoever arising
for telephone orders must be made by MasterCard
for resale will be returned without credit or refund. out of, or in connection with, the supply of goods or
or VISA. Mail order payment may be made by MC/
A $2 fee will be charged on exchanges. All returns services by Elektor Electronics USA other than to sup-
VISA, money order, cashier's check or personal
must be made within 30 days of invoice date. ply goods as described, or at the option of Elektor Elec-
check. If payment is made by personal check, allow
Books, software, CDs, and recordings are not eligi- tronics USA, to refund the purchaser any money paid
up to two weeks for check clearance before your
ble for return or refund. in respect of the goods.
order is shipped. Should acheck be returned for any
reason, there will be a $10 service charge.
WARRANTY LAW
SHIPPING We warrant that all items sold conform to the qual- Any question relating to the supply of goods and ser-
Unless noted, freight is prepaid by Old Colony. ity and specifications set forth. We make no represen- vices by Elektor Electronics USA or its subsidiaries
All orders shipped USPS first class mail or by UPS. tations. We accept no responsibility whatever for fur- shall be determined in all respects by the laws of the
Allow two to three weeks for delivery. Please inquire ther use by the customer. We accept no monetary United States of America and/or the State of New
about appropriate funds for special handling (UPS liability in excess of the original cost or replacement Hampshire.

BOOKS FROM ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA

MICROPROCESSOR DATA BOOK 303 CIRCUITS
This book has come about because of a need by Elektor Electronics Like its predecessors, 303 CIRCUITS offers acomprehensive collection
engineers, technicians, and editorial staff of a ready reference work on of practical ideas, concepts, and developments in the gamut of elec-
the most important microprocessors. This implies that it does not only tronics. Unlike its predecessors, the book is arranged in 11 subject sec-
contain information on the latest devices, such as the transputer, but tions to make it easier for the reader to find that long-sought circuit.
also on older, well-established types, such as the Z80 and the 6800. In well over 300 pages, the book offers 32 Audio and Hi-Fi projects;
A general description, hardware block schematic, software structure, 14 circuits for Car and Bicycles; 43 Computer & Microprocessor circuits;
DC characteristics, and instruction sets are given for over 70 micro- 11 Electrophonic projects; 24 HF and VHF circuits; 16 circuits for a
processors. To prevent the book from becoming unwieldy (and to keep number of hobbies and pastimes; 54 projects for Home and Garden;
costs down), timing diagrams and AC characteristics have, however, been 29 Power Supply circuits; 29 circuits for Test and Measurement equip-
omitted. The detailed information on all manufacturers mentioned will, ment; nine TV and Video projects; as well as 42 Design Ideas.
however, enable any additional information to be obtained quite readily. ISBN 0-905705-62-2
Included in the book are, among others: BKAA13 Price 615.90
• the 68000 series
• the 6502 family DATA SHEET BOOK 2
• Z80; 8080; and 8085 Like its predecessor (now out of print), this book offers concise, rele-
• Intel's 8086; 80186; 80188; 80286 80386 vant, and rapidly accessible information, which is both practical (e.g.,
• the NS32XXX series the pin-out of a device) and informative.
• the INMOS transputers The book contains data on integrated circuits as well as on discrete
ISBN 0-905705-28-9 transistors and diodes. Moreover, it gives an introduction to fast
BKAA16 Price $17.90 (HCMOS) devices and a review of the new symbolic logic as laid down
in British Standard BS3939:Section 21 (IEC Standard 617-12).
302 CIRCUITS The final part of the book deals with a number of computer chips,
The popularity of this book is shown by its having been reprinted no such as memory devices (including programming information for these)
fewer than three times. It offers a selection of the most interesting ar- and I/O circuits. This section also includes data on a number of non-
ticles from the 1982, 1983, 1984 summer issues of Elektor Electronics. digital discrete and integrated devices, such as op amps, as well as on
In it you will find circuits for audio and video; car, cycle, and motorcy- some microprocessor peripherals (e.g., the 6522 VIA, the 6580 ACIA,
cle; home and garden; receivers and aerials; hobbies and games; and the 8355A PPI)
measuring and testing; oscillators and generators; current sources and ISBN 0-905705-27-0
power supplies; microcomputers and music electronics; and amiscellany BKAA14 Price $16.50
of other interesting subjects.
ISBN 0-905705-25-4
BKAA12 Price $12.50

These books are all available direct from Elektor Electronics USA through the Readers Services, from a number of bookshops and electronics
retailers in the US and Canada, and from selected bookshops throughout the world.

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 67

Sure, high tech audio has its share of mystery, hype

and mystique. But all that clears up when you ven-
ture with us behind the front panel. At first, you may
be satisfied to just look around, and check things out
with the schematic. Very soon, you'll begin to
understand what that mumbo jumbo is all about.
Then whenever you like, you can start improving

Start reading
your system's performance in ways that mass pro-
duction doesn't allow.
If that sounds overly optimistic, read that first
quote again. It's from a reader who had never

Audio Amateur an
opened the back of a set,
never read a schematic or
plugged in a soldering

you 11 soon be
iron— before subscribing to Audio Amateur. And
9 there are thousands more like her who've been
turning garden variety preamps into something
really special by replacing the power supply,
upgrading the components, or actually improving

wit
r ng us letters
the circuit design.
-
And this is only a fraction of what
Audio Amateur has been doing for
thousands of readers during the
past twenty years.

just like these

We've done it in part by publishing authoritative
articles about audio technology by people who have
improved their own systems. Most often, they're non-
audio engineers who recognize that there are better
ways to reproduce sound than commercial products
"I never realized that an absolute novice like allow. We also publish original designs as good or
me could really get into the electronics of my better than those on the market—and always at far
music system and make changes that would lower cost. We always tell you where to find the
improve the sound so dramatically." parts you need. Not surprising, there are specialist
Gayle Farris, Denver, CO 80216 suppliers who offer kits based on the articles.
But it's not all "work." You'll meet the who's who
"I scratch-built the last PAS with certain in audio. You'll enjoy the lively exchange of ideas in
modifications...a much more stiffly regulated our reader letters. Audio Aids is a forum where
heater circuit, and one cathode follower readers share their tricks and ideas. Booktalk has
tube function in the RIAA stage... and it reviews of old and new audio books. And you'll learn
sounds great." about all that's really unusual among the new. Our
Zoltan Gal, Gyor Hungary free classified ads for subscribers and audio clubs
provide a great meeting ground.
"The servo article (by Brian Clark) is now my pet All this will lead you to hours of hands-on pleasure
project, and I'm trying to apply it to my PA Audio IV and listening with a satisfaction you had never ex-
H preamp...it would allow me to eliminate three perienced before. But that's not all. You'll find that
100uF aluminum electrolytics from the signal path." new venture so engrossing you'll wonder what
S. F. Lataros, Nazareth, PA 18064 happened to all that stress.
It's easy to get started. Just have your Mastercard
or VISA handy when you call us at (603) 924-9464,
any working day between 9 and 4. Or use the
coupon. There's nothing dated about Audio Amateur,
so your subscription starts with the first issue of this
year. And they'll arrive in about six weeks.

Send me Audio Amateur

Post Office Box 576, Dept. E91, Peterborough, NH 03458-0576
LI one year for $20. LI two years for $35
LI I'm enclosing acheck/money order. LI Use my credit card
Iunderstand that my subscription will start with the first issue
published in 1991 and each year's subscription will end with the

AudioAnateur
last issue of that year. Canada: please add $4 per year postage

NAME

STREET 8. NO

THE JOURNAL FOR AUDIOPHILE CRAFTS CITY STATE ZIP

MC/VISA EXP

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 68

BOOKS from Old Colony Sound Lab

BUILDER'S GUIDES, general BUILDER'S GUIDES, specific (cookbooks)

BKAA-4 KILLER CAR STEREO ON A BUDGET $19.95 S-9 REGULATED POWER SUPPLIES $21.95
MH-2 HOW TO MAKE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS . $8.90 S-10 IC OP AMP COOKBOOK $21.95
S-25 ELECTRONIC PROTOTYPE CONSTRUCTION $17.95 S-13 AUDIO IC OP AMP APPLICATIONS $19.95
S-27 DESIGN OF OP AMP CIRCUITS $12.95 S-14 ACTIVE FILTER COOKBOOK $15.95
S-32 HOW TO READ SCHEMATICS $14.95 S-17 IC TIMER COOKBOOK $17.95
T-8 ENHANCED SOUND-22 Electronics Projects S-18 TTL COOKBOOK $14.95
for the Audiophile $11.95 S-26 CMOS COOKBOOK $18.95
T-10 ACOUSTIC TECHNIQUES FOR HOME
AND STUDIO $18.95
TUTORIAL
BKAA-3/1 AUDIO ANTHOLOGY (Vol. 1) $16.95
SOUND ENGINEERING, REFERENCE WORKS BKAA-3/2 AUDIO ANTHOLOGY (Vol. 2) $16.95
BKAA-3/3 AUDIO ANTHOLOGY (Vol. 3) $16.95
B-1 LOUDSPEAKER AND HEADPHONE
BKAA-3/S AUDIO ANTHOLOGY (Vols. 1-3) $42.00
HANDBOOK $110.00
BKAA-5 LOUDSPEAKERS: The Why & How of
MH-1 HANDBOOK FOR ELECTRONICS
Good Reproduction $6.95
ENGINEERING TECHNICIANS (2nd Ed.) ....$49.95
BKAA-6 THE VVILLIAMSON AMPLIFIER $4.95
MH-4 AUDIO ENGINEERING HANDBOOK $86.95
D-3 MUSIC, PHYSICS AND ENGINEERING $8.95
NE-1 NEW EARS: A Guide to Education and
P-8 INTRODUCING MUSIC $5.95
the Recording Sciences $11.95
S-4 UNDERSTANDING IC OPERATIONAL
PH-1 HANDBOOK OF SIMPLIFIED SOLID-STATE
AMPLIFIERS $12.95
CIRCUIT DESIGN $39.95
S-29 PRINCIPLES OF DIGITAL AUDIO $29.95
RR-1 1990 ARRL HANDBOOK FOR THE
T-7 BASIC ELECTRONICS COURSE $17.95
RADIO AMATEUR $23.00
T-11 UNDERSTANDING ELECTRONICS (3rd Ed.) .. $11.95
S-19 SOUND SYSTEM ENGINEERING $49.95
S-28 HANDBOOK FOR SOUND ENGINEERS: The New
Audio Cyclopedia $79.95
X-1 PERCEPTION OF REPRODUCED SOUND $35.00 LOUDSPEAKERS (see also sound engineering)
BKAA-1 AUDIO AMATEUR LOUDSPEAKER PROJECTS . $20.00
BKAA-2 THE LOUDSPEAKER DESIGN COOKBOOK .... $19.95
DICTIONARIES BKAA-8 BULLOCK ON BOXES $10.95
S-11 HOW TO BUILD SPEAKER ENCLOSURES $6.95
BKAA-7/S THE AUDIO GLOSSARY (Softbound) $9.95 T-12 DESIGNING, BUILDING AND TESTING YOUR
BKAA-7/H THE AUDIO GLOSSARY (Hardbound) $17.95 OWN SPEAKER SYSTEM-WITH PROJECTS .$16.95
BKAA-7/L THE AUDIO GLOSSARY (Limited Edition) $30.00 W-1 HIGH PERFORMANCE LOUDSPEAKERS $38.95
S-22 MODERN DICTIONARY OF ELECTRONICS .. $39.95
T-9 THE ILLUSTRATED DICTIONARY OF
ELECTRONICS $24.95 GUIDEBOOKS AND DATABOOKS
P-2 DICTIONARY OF ELECTRONICS $8.95
P-3 A NEW DICTIONARY OF MUSIC $8.95 N-6 GENERAL PURPOSE LIN DEVICES (LIN DBK 1) $16.95
N-7 DATA ACQUIS LIN DEVICES ....(LIN DBK 2) $10.95
N-8 SPECIAL PURPOSE LIN DEVICES .(LIN DBK 3) $10.95
N-678 LINEAR DATA BOOKS (3-volume set) $35.00
SPECIAL! N-9 LINEAR APPLICATIONS HANDBOOK $16.95
BKL/K: BKAA-2 ($19.95) plus BKAA-4 ($19.95) for $30 ($2 Siff) P-IA THE PENGUIN GUIDE TO COMPACT DISCS,
CASSETTES AND LPs $19.95

NOTE: BOOKS ARE NOT RETURNABLE FOR EXCHANGE OR CREDIT. Prices

are subject to change without notice. Please print in clear block capitals quantity
needed, book number and price. Total the amounts and REMIT IN US $ONLY by
MC/VISA, check or money order. Charge card orders under $10, please include an
additional $2.
POSTAGE & HANDLING: In US, please add $1.75 for first book and 50tt each ad-
ditional book. In Canada, please add $4.50. Overseas, please include 20% of total
order for shipping.

DEALER INQUIRIES INVITED

NAME MAGIC NO

OW. BOOk No. Price

STREET &NO.

STATE ZIP

MC/VISA EXP.

OLD COLONY SOUND LAB

PO Box 243. Dept. E91. Peterborough. New Hampshire 03458-0243 USA
(603) 924-6371 /924-6526 /FAX: (603) 924-9467

Postage S Answering machine for credit card orders only: (603)924-6371

before 9:00 a.m.. after 4:00 p.m. and weekends.
E MC E VISA E CK/MO TOTAL S Have information plus MC/VISA available.
WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 69

If you had to invent anew

En4 language, where would you begin?
Back when high quality sound reproduction was
anew idea and J. Gordon Holt was astaffer at
High Fidelity magazine, manufacturers and jour-
what has become known as "subjective review-
ing" but also the language with which to do it.

o
Today. the magazine he founded has become a
nalists alike depended on the simple technical major force in audio quality judgments around the
quality tests which everyone accepted as the yard- world. And almost all the vocabulary definitions
sticks for performance. As the industry grew. are his work.
equipment got better, competition fiercer, and
technical reviewing became more crucial to sales Seldom will you have the opportunity to purchase
a reference work backed by so much primary
managers. Before long. J. Gordon began to realize
research and experience. Few reviewers have
that reviewing was becoming more and more ac-
commodating. and where the reviewers con- spent more time and energy in an honest search
for adefined, factual account of what matters in
tinued to rely on the standard tests, the measure-
good sound reproduction techniques. In audio
ment data began to look more and more alike.
equipment reviewing, J. Gordon Holt is not only
Finally, in frustration, Holt left Great Barrington apioneer but amaster.
and headed for home in Pennsylvania where he
founded St- ereophile magazine in the spare room THE AUDIO GLOSSARY is the first publication
of his mother's house. He became convinced that of not only avocabulary for sound description,
but also acomprehensive overview of over 1.900
although equipment tests and measurements
audio terms: technical and subjective. Your copy
were important, they no longer accounted for the
differences he could hear. Two devices could is waiting—at your favorite dealer—or order direct

o
using the coupon below.
easily measure the same and yet sound quite
different.
Holt abhorred the tendency of the larger maga-
zines to depend almost entirely on measurements,
which he saw as asafe way to review without

tibio
disturbing the manufacturer with any bad news. DEALER
Not only that, he realized that not one of the US INQUIRIES
INVITED
audio publications was publishing reviews that _Os sAer
were critical of equipment. In fact, in some cases
they were ignoring some flaws.
However, if the reviewer wishes to review how

te4
equipment sounds, he faces asevere problem.
Our sense of hearing has the smallest vocabulary
of any of our five senses. Thus, Gordon faced the
difficulty of describing sound differences with all
too few words with which to do it. He not only
had to invent the techniques and disciplines of

o
111 YES! Please send me The Audio Glossazy!
TOTAL CK/M0 enclosed EMC El VISA
_Softbound BKAA-7IS @ $9.95
NAME
_Hardbound wl dust jacket BKAA-7IH I@ $17.95
STREET & NO
_Autographed Limited Edition BKAA-7/L @ $30
STATE ZIP
Please add $1.75 shipping for first book. 501 each add'I CITY

TOTAL ORDER $ MCNISA EXP

OLD COLONY SOUND LAB

PO Box 243, Dept. E91
Peterborough, NH 03458-0243 USA
(603) 924-6371 I924-6526 FAX: (603) 924-9467
Answering machine for credit card orders only: (603) 924-6371 before 9:00 Lm., after 4:00 p.m., and weekends
Have information plus MCNISA available.

•also available at your favorite audio dealer •

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
70

FOR SALE CLASSIFIEDS WANTED

Altec 9860A studio active equalizers 1/3-octave 2C Wanted (cheap-for personal use): dbx 3BX (4BX?):
controls per channel high/low filters, perfect, $95 HK Citation 5 amplifier, $250; Fisher 500C receiver Commodore 64 or 128, Atari, Apple II, Macintosh
each; Superphon Revelation dual mono preamp, with case, $150; Dynaco PAT-4A preamp, $50; computers, JBL 2245H 18" woofer. Angel Rivera,
latest, new, $260; Thorens TP13 arm with lift, mint, Dynaco FM-5 tuner, $50; Sony ST-J55 tuner, $75; 1845-52nd St., #32, Brooklyn, NY 11204. (718)
$35; Denon AU320 moving coil transformer, mint, Sherwood S5000 amplifier, $35; Sherwood S3000111 837-3203.
$50; Denon DL103D moving coil cartridge, mint, $60; stereo tuner, $25; Eico ST-40 amplifier, $35; AR XB
TD150 MKII dust cover, $10. Horace Vignale, (703)
578-4929.
turntable, $35. All excellent or better, all plus shipp-
ing. Jon, (714) 828-1189.
YOUR CLASSIFIED AD BELONGS HERE

CLASSIFIED ORDER FORM

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 so
El Private For Sale El Private Wanted III Trade If Trade please indicate # of insertions.
Private ads are on a one time insertion basis. Must be resubmitted for renewal. Ads cannot be taken over the phone.
Definition of aword: A series of letters with aspace before and after. Please remember to include your name, address and telephone
number when making calculations. In order for Private For Sale and Want ads to be free you must be acurrent subscriber. Ten dollar
minimum charge for charge card orders and Trade ads.
Any words over 50, 2oe per word; Trade ads please charge at 70C El Check/Money Order enclosed
per word and indicate number of insertions. Deduct 10% for a6x
contract; deduct 15% for a11x (year) contract in Elektor Electronics
USA. Payment must accompany first ad. NAME

Please charge to my MasterCardNisa: COMPANY

CARD NUMBER EXP. DATE STREET ADDRESS

SIGNATURE CITY STATE ZIP

THE CURE FOR

WIMPY SOUND The world's best loudspeaker book should be on your shelf
if you are serious about speaker systems
Here in one place are all the definitions for closed or vented boxes,
woofers, passive radiators, transmission lines, how to do
cabinets and choose drivers. What to do about crossovers.
How to build and test your project. "...The best single reference
available." Robert M. Bullock, Ill, Professor of Applied Math.,
Miami University, Oxford, OH; Contributing Editor, Speaker Builder.
81
2 x 11 format, 82pp., softbound $19.95
/

Order Today! Send me copies at $19.95

Add $1.75 postage and handling per book. MC VISA CK/M0

MC/VISA EXP

Street & No

City State Zip

LI Please send me Old Colony's FREE catalog of audio books, kits, and software.
OLD COLONY SOUND LAB PO Box 243, Dept. E91
Peterborough, NH 03458-0243, (603) 924-6371 FAX: (603) 924-9467

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 Digital model train (4) 87291-4 10.50 5
Analogue multimeter 890035 25.00 5
DTMF system decoder 890060 13.00 5

MASTER PRODUCT LIST Sine-wave converter

8-digit frequency meter
MIDI keyboard interface
UPBS-1
880128
3.90
23.00
5
6

decoder board 890105-1 14.00 7/8

ELEKTOR/ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA controller board

Floppy disk monitor
890105-2 10.50 7/8

driver board 890078 8.50 7/8

counter/display board 85019 6.50 7/8
A number of projects carried in the British Elektor Electronics and in Elektor Electronics USA are Function generator UPBS-1 3.90 7/8
Digital model train 87291-4 13.40 9
supported by ready-made printed circuit boards (PCBs), self-adhesive front panel foils, ROMs, Stereo viewer 890044 11.20 9
EPROMs, PALs, microcontrollers and diskettes, which may be ordered from Old Colony Sound Centronics monitor 890123 11.00 9
Resonance meter 886071 7.80 9
Lab through our Readers Services using the order form printed every month on the Readers Ser- Inductance meter 890119 14.50 10

vices page. Items not listed here or on this month's Readers Services page are not available. Logic analyzer for 890126 10.50 10
Atari ST
Old Colony is happy to accept orders by mail, or by phone or FAX 24 hours/day. Customers may CD error detector 890131 12.00 10
Digital model train (8) 87291-5 8700 11
use check or money order (US funds) or Mastercard/VISA. Extension card for 890108 36.00 11
Archimedes
SHIPPING: Please add $1.75 for first item, 504 each additional. Outside the US, please Extension card for 890108-9 58.50 11

add $4.50 total. Archimedes, incl.

PAL and diskette
31
2 -digit LED SMD
/ 890117 7.50 11
voltmeter
OLD COLONY SOUND LAB Digital model train 87291-7 17.50 12
EPROM simulator 890166 20.09 12
PO Box 243, Dept. E91 Hard disk monitor 890186 22.60 12

Peterborough, NH 03458-0243 USA LF/HF signal tracer 890183 16.00 12

Solid-state preamp 890170-1 23.50 12
(603) 924-6371 /924-6526 FAX: (603) 924-9467 890170-3' 18.50 12
Transistor curve tracer 890177 11.50 12
Answering machine for credit card orders only:
(603) 924-6371 before 9:00 a.m., after 4:00 p.m. and weekends
Have information plus MCNISA available.

1990
Video mixer (1) 87304-1 54.50 1
Mini EPROM 809164 14.00 1
programmer
ROMS-EPROMS-PALS-NIICROCONTROLLERS All-solid-state 890170-2' 31.50 1
Issue Mo. Description Pike (S) preamplifier
ArticterProtect
Universal terminal 11/83 525 1 x 2732 18.00 Simple AC 900004 13.00 1
Wind direction indicator 1/84 526 1 x 2716 14.60 millivoltmeter
Elabyrinth 3/84 527 1 02716 14.60 •The four PCBs required for the preamplifier (2 x890170-1:
EPROM copier 5/84 528 1x 2716 14.60 1x890170-2; and 1x890170-3) are available as apack-
Analytical video display 5/84 529 1x 82S23 9.60 age, ref. 890170-9, at adiscounted price of $85. asavings
6/84 530 2 x 2716 29.20 of $11.50.
Typewriter interface
8P-controlled frequency meter 12/84 531 1 x 2732 18.00 Initialization aid for 900007 28.50 2
X-Y plotter 4/85 532 1n 2732 18.00 printers
Programmable timer 5/85 535 1x 2732 18.00 Digital model train (11) 87291-8 9.00 2
GHz prescaler 7/85 536 1x 2732 18.00 Reflex MW AM receiver UPBS-1 3.90 2
Automate your model railway Book • 537 1x 2716 14.60 Video mixer (2) 87304-2 32.50 2
Marine computer 10/85 538 1x 2716 14.60 Capacitance meter 900012 14.50 2
Jumbo clock 12/85 539 1 x 2716 29.20 PRINTED CIRCUIT Digital model train (12) 87291-9 7.00 3
Graphics card 3/86 543 2 o 82S123 19.60 IC monitor 896140 15.00 3
BOARDS
Printer buffer 5/86 545 1 02716 14.60 Power line monitor 960025 9.50 3
EPROM programmer for MSX computers 4/87 552UK 1x 27128 20.00 tle. Price (S) Issus Video mixer (3) 87304-3 32.50 3
Bus interface for high -res LCD screens 12/88 560 1x 2764 20.00 1984 BBD sound effects unit 900010 15.50 4
Intelligent time standard (ITS.) 2/88 553 1x 2764 20.00 Mini Crescendo power 84041 13.00 5 Digital model train (13) 87291-10 8.00 4
I/O extension card for IBM PCs and compatibles 7-8/88 561 1 u 16L8 17.50 amplifier 0 meter 900031 12.00 4
Centronics interface for slide fader 10/88 562 1 x 16R4 17.50 Function generator 84111 16.30 12 RS-232 splitter 900017-1 14.50 4
8P-controlled radio synthesizer 9/88 564 1o 27C64 20.00 900017-2 9.00 4
Portable MIDI keyboard 11/88 567 1 x 2764 20.00 Video line selector 900032 13.00 4
Pitch control for CD players 12/88 568 1 x 2764 20.00 MEER Acoustic temperature UPBS-1 3.90 5
MIDI control unit 1/89 570 1 x27C64 20.00 Oscillator board for 85015 4.80 1 monitor
The digital model train Series 572 1x 2764 20.00 8P-controlled Budget sweep function 900040 14.00 5
Darkroom clock 2/90 583 1 x27128 18.50 frequency meter generator
Slave indication unit for I.T.S. 3/88 700 1 x8748H 30.00 Centronics ADC/DAC 900037D 30.50 5
EPROM emulator 9/87 701 1 x 8748H 30.00
EMI Transistor characteristic 900058 9.50 5
Microcontroller-driven power supply 9/88 702 1 x 8751 95.00 Top-of-the-range 86111-3A 13.80 11 plotting
Autonomous I/O controller 12/88 704 1 x 8751 95.00 preamplifier 86111-1 20.80 11 Electronic load 900342 24.00 6
Video mixer 3/90 5861 1 n 2764 20.00 simulator
Four-sensor sunshine recorder 6/90 5921 1x 27128 20.00 Mini EPROM viewer 900030 36.00 6
8P-controlled telephone exchange 10/90 5941 1x 27128 26.00 REM Power zener diode UPBS-1 3.90 6
8751 programmer 11/90 5951 1x 8751 95.00 BASIC computer 87192 40.50 11 Compact 10A power 900045 23.00 7/8
'Out of print supply
Intermediate projects UPBS-1 4.00 7/8
Mini FM transmitter 896118 8.50 7/8
DISKETTES I/O extension card 880038 57.20 7/8 Sound demodulator for 900057 7.50 7/8
for IBM PCs satellite-TV receivers
Digital model train Series 109 5t4" 11.50
Logic analyzer for Atari ST (for monochrome systems only) 10/89 111 3Yz" 20.00 Audio power 904004 7.50 7/8
Computer-controlled Teletext decoder 10/89 113 5,4" 20.00 1989 indicator
Plotter driver 3/90 117 51
4 "
/ 11.50 FAX interface for 880109 14.70 1 Four-monitor driver 904067 10.50 7/8
eao 119 (2)5 1
4 "
/ 14.00 Atari ST and for PCs
FAX interface for IBM PCs
RAM extension for BBC-B 7-8/89 123 5,4" 10.00 Archimedes High-current hF,tester 900078 11.00 9
EPROM simulator 12/89 129 5,4" 11.50 MIDI control unit 880178-1 18.10 1 Infrared remote control 904085/86 3.50 9
RS-232 splitter 4/90 1411 51
/"
4 11.50 880178-2 13.30 1 8P-controlled telephone 900081 36.00 10
Centronics ADC/DAC 5/90 1421 11.50 Low-budget UPBS-1 3.90 1 exchange
Transistor characteristic plotting for Atari ST 5/90 1431 31
2 "
/ 13.00 capacitance meter Medium power audio 900098 18.00 10
(for monochrome systems only) MOSFET power 87096 24.70 2 amplifier
ROM-copy for BASIC computer 9/90 1441 51
2 "
/ 13.00 amplifier S-VHS/CVBS-to-RGB 900055 24.50 10
8751 programmer 11/90 1471 51
4 "
/ 13.00 Digital model train 87291-1 8.40 2 converter
PT100 thermometer 11/90 1481 51
/"
4 13.00 Touch key organ 886077 20.10 2 400W lab power supply 900082 22.00 11
Car service module 86765 7.20 2 Active mini subwooter 900122-1 12.00 11
886126 8.20 2 Medium power audio 900098 18.00 11
SELF -ADHESIVE FRONT PANEL FOILS VHF receiver 886127 14.90 2 amplifier
Autonomous I/O controller 1/89 880184-F 17.00 Power line modem 880189 12.20 3 Programmer for 8751 900100 14.00 11

Analogue multimeter 5/89 890035-F 15.80 Centronics buffer 890007-1 39.20 3 PT100 thermometer 900106 10.00 11
All-solid-state preamplifier 1/90 890170-F1 33.50 890007-2 4.30 3 Active mini subwoofer 900122-2 10.50 12
890170-F2 18.50 890007-3 16.70 3 Milliohmmeter 910004 10.00 12
LF/HF signal tracer 12/89 890183-F 17.00 Digital model train 87291-2/3 8.60 4 Phase check for 900114-1/2 16.00 12

Video mixer 3/90 87304-F 33.00 Function generator UPBS-1 3.90 4 audio systems
0 meter 4/90 900031-F 23.00 Triplet 890013-1 13.30 4 Signal suppressor for 904024 7.50 12
Budget sweep/function generator 5/90 900040-F 20.00 890013-2 13.60 4 all-solid-state preamp
High-current hrE tester 9/90 990078-F 28.00 Multi-point IR control 890019-1 690 4 Audio input selector 904039 12.50 12
400-watt laboratory PSU 11/90 900082-F 35.00 890019-2 8.10 4 Search time monitor 904052 8.00 12

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
115
Courteous Service • Discount Prices • Fast Shipping
In 1988, Madisound Speaker Components processed
e CORR 20,000 orders
VIFA DYNAUDIO PERFECT LAY
P.O. Box 567 •Van Nuys, CA 91408
FOCAL MB QUART SIDEWINDER
** New **FLASH UNITS FLASHER LED'S PHILIPS AUDAX ELECTRO VOICE
This NEW compact
I/
Rubicon CE EUROPA PEERLESS SLEDGEHAMMER
flash unit cornes from Nn 210 Mfd 330 Volt
aU.S. manufacturer photoflash capacitor. MOREL SOLEN
0.79 dia. X 1.r high.
of cameras. Unit KEF ETON
operates on 3Vdc These are new capacitors
and measures • that have been prepped with te
2 1/2" X 1lie. • blackand red wire leads soldered
Doesn't your hobby deserve these fine product lines?
Ideal for use as astrobe, to the terminals.
warning light or attention CATI PPC-210 $1.25 each
getter. Complete with instruction on how to wire. 10 for $11.00 • 100 for $103.00 MADISOUND SPEAKER COMPONENTS
CATI FSH-1 $3.75 each 10 for $35.03 Large quantities available.
8608 University Green
INSTRUMENT POWER SUPPLIES Box 4283, Madison, WI 53711
ENCLOSURES 5Vdc 3AMP ÇpL I'hone (608) 831-3433 FAX: (608) 831-3771
High quality molded ACDC Electronics A1I «9
ABS instrument #5N3-1 New, ,•,,e 4Z1.
,•
enclosures. Integrated
PC board standoffs
and two sets of vertical
prepped power
supply with wires 11.
-- _1 THE R.F. CONNECTION
and connectors soldered to he inputs and
mounting slots for outputs. Open frame style. 4.94" X 4.03' X 213 North Frederick Ave. #11
front and rear sub panels. All enclosures are 2". Input: 115 Vac. UL and CSA listed. Rag- Gaithersburg, MD 20877
s- wide X 6 1/4' deep. Choice of three hts. ulated. CATI PS-53 $10.00 each
Includes non-skid rubber feet and hardware. ORDERS 1-800-783-2666
Available in Ivory, black, and blue. 12 Vdc 5AMP
ACM Electronics # 12N5 or equiv. INFO 301-840-5477 FAX 301-869-3680
Panel Al CATO
2 ire CATI MB-A $7.50 ea 10 /$65.00 Input: 100-240 Vac (wired for 115 Vac) THIS LIST REPRESENTS ONLY A
25ie• CAT/. MB-B $7.75 ea 10 /$67.50 Output: 12 Vdc 05 amps. Open frame FRACTION OF OUR HUGE INVENTORY"
e CAT,* MB-C $8.00 ea 10 /$70.00 style. 7- X 43/4" X 3" high. Regulated.
"Specialist in RF Connectors and Coax"
Please specify color. CATI PS-125 $37.50 each
Part No. Description Price

HEAVY-DUTY NICKEL 24 Vdc 2.4 AMP PL.259IUSA UHF Male Phenolic, USA made S 70
Power-One Inc. #HC -24-2.4 PL.259/ST UHF Male Silver Teflon USA I50
. CADMIUM "C" BATTERY Input: 115/230 Vac (wired for 115 Vac) UG-2101U N Male RG.8, 213,214 Delta 325
UG 218th N Male RG.8, 213. 214. Kings 5.00
Output: 24 Vdc 0 2.4 amps. Open f fame N Mate Pin for 9913. 9086,8214
9913/PIN
Yuasa 1800C Special purchase of new, style. 5.62' X4.8T X 2.5o• CSA listed. Fits UG-21 DIU & UG-21 8/UN's 150
rechargeable CATO PS-2424 $30.00 each UG-21D/9913 N Male for RG.8 with 9913 Pin 3.95
nickel-cad batterlen. ,I UG-211319913 N Male for RG.8 with 9913 Pin 5.75
1.2 volts, 1800 mAH. lÙ 6 Volt 1Amp/Hour UG-146A/U N Male to S0.239, letton USA 803
PRICE REDUCED ON 10 OR MORE. ECHARGEABLE BATTER UG-1113B/U N Female to PL-259. Teflon USA 600
CATI HDHCB-C PRICES DO NOT INCLUDE SHIPPING
10 pieces for $42.50 ($4.25 each) JAPAN STORAGE PRICES SUBJECT TO CHANGE
100 pieces for $375.00 ($3.75 each) BATTERY CO. je•->4.\ VISA, MASTERCARD, ADD 4%
Portalac# PE6V1 UPS C.O.D. ADD $3.50 PER ORDER
OPTO SENSOR 6Volt 1Ah rechargeable
sealed lead-acid (gell cell). L__jyi
TRW*OPB 822SD
2" X 1.635" X 2" high.
Reflective scanner module.
Batteries are prepped with 5" black and
U-shaped device with 4 bads .,
red leads terminated with 2pin connector. INDEX OF ADVERTISERS
each side (8 total). 0.09" gap.
Ideal for rechargeable reserve power.
CAT# OSU-10 75c each
CATI GC-61 $4.75 each •10 for $42.50

Experimentors Delight All Electronics 72

ATARI 5200 VIDEO GAME CONTROLLERS Antique Electronic Supply 74
Atari video game controllers returned to the Audio Amateur Publications
dealer because of various defects. - ,..=.,....„.••T:73,_.
None of them work properly, but they , The Audio Amateur 67
have lots of great pans. A RF video '_% r-
=..:
1
•%-----
::.... „.__iTt...._.
•- ----,
modulator,eight 16K dynamic RAMs '''' .."-No.... •Vi- '''''•e-•.. CIE 5
,,, •••• ,,i-. ii.,..,-..- • •
in sockets, microprocessors and D-A
'- ::.- = •- ' ""•--....•,..;/,t. , Kelvin Electronics 73
converters in sockets, two voltage 7

regulators on aheavy-duty heatsink and lots Madisound Speaker Components 72

of other es, capacitors, resistors, connectors and other corrponents. Does not include the
power transformer or controls (joysticks). CATI A-5200 $7.50 each •2for $13.50 Mark V Electronics 8
SOLO AS-IS For Porte Only. No returns accepted.

LINESn.
"
Morel Acoustics USA 9
TOLL FREE ORDER NRI School of Electronics 7

. . ..:,800.826.5432
.AFIGE
„: : :,. . .
ORDERS to Visa, MosterCard or DIscover.
Old Colony Sound Laboratory
Audio GlossarylHolt 69

Books 65, 66, 68

TERMS: Minimum order $1a00.Shipping and handling for the 48 continental USA $3.50
per order. All others including AK, HL PR or Canada must pay lull shipping All orders Bullock on Boxes 4
delivered in CALIFORAIL4 must include state sales tax (6 %, 6 12%, 7%). EPROMS, etc 65, 71
Quantities Limited. NO C. 00. Prices subject to change without notice.
Call Toll Free, or clip this couEon Front Panels 65, 71

FREE 60 Page Catalog containing over 4,000 ITEMS Loudspeaker Design Cookbook 70

ALL ELECTRONICS CORPORATION Printed Circuit Boards 65, 71

P.O. Box 567 •Van Nuys, CA •91408 Software 6 65, 71
Verany Test CDs 10
Optoelectronics Cover IV
Add,..r PacComm Systems 74
PC Boards 51
CM,. SW, ZIP
urn
The R. F. Connection 72
Sescom Cover II
Tab Books Cover Ill

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS I:SA JANUARY 1991
--
SUPER
:NKELVIN
Dan
Elec ro,nics IA
NDUSTRIAL Q UALITY
T DISCOUNT PRICES
I
I
he Professionals'Choice
BREADBOARDS FOR LESS! PRO 400 SOLDERING EQUIPMENT
DURABLE - MADE OF THE HIGHEST QUALITY with 20MHz FREQUENCY COUNTER excellent for WELLER
COMPUTER. TV, VCR REPAIR and ENGINEERING.
PLASTIC - DESIGNED TO WITHSTAND THOUSANDS MARKSMAN
OF INSERTION CYCLES
YOU CANT SOLDERING GUN.._ _
Model SP23
GO WRONG!
111 ee
Featherweight 1-3/4 oz., 25 watts for PC work. Ideal for
reaching into those hard to get spots. Replaceable tip.
MONEY BACK 1Pat«
Stock No. YOUR COST 6+
IP-4 GUARANTEE! 810002 $8.55 ea $7.95 ea

ii 0 LOGIC TEST
a DIODE CHECK
et SOLDERING
IRON HOLDER
II I D CONTINUITY TESTER t
n e;
-»
¡ • Model PH60
W._ ,
5FREQUENCY RANGES oo-ff • :.,.
ii.
--èo
-'
.'. Soldering stand with base. sponge. 04
El TRANSISTOR hFE TEST
ei- For W601c, WP25P, WP4OP, and irons with barrel diameters
Contact YOUR
• 5 CAPACITANCE RANGES
,,,- ,...
' up to 15i3Z.
0 LED TEST VERIFY lol;' -...
r- f• Stock No. Description YOUR COST 6+
Fig. Stock No. Points COST
•20MHz F R E 0 couertER *ix.' • .'.fo 810041 PH60 Stand $13.78 ea $13.09 ea
A 680093 500 $ 4.25 ea 0 AC/DC VOLTAGE RANGES ,_.....t«._wq -;.. ,-
,1
810042
f
----.ii% -
,,,a.A...-....
- •:f:..i.
.fff• - 1114_I , ..---
...
Replacement
• ACMC CURRENT 1.89 ea $ 1.80 ea

69
B 680097 840 $ 5.95 ea RANGES Sponge $

680098 1380 $11.75 ea KESTER SOLDER

.
,
-e. .-. ,.,
C if 0 o-tDe
Ye
C AI
I
Sow.
E $ 95
RESIN CORE SOLDERS 1 LB. ROLL
D 680099 1580 $15.75 ea D urab le,
Non-Corrosive Flux ResinCore
WIRE JUMPER KIT Back Stand Stock No. 990092
KELVIN PRO 400
Stock No. Inch Dia. GA. Type YOUR COST
Use with Quick test sock,ets and bus stubs PROTECTIVE CARRY CASE 580010 1/64" .025 23 63/37 $11.95 ea
Stock No. 990094 $9.95 ea 580005 1/32 .031 21 60/40 $9.95 ea
Stock No. Description Points YOUR COST 580001 1/16" .062 16 60/40 $8.95 ea
330290 350 Piece Set $ 7.75 ea 30 DAY MONEY BACK GUARANTEE! 580011 3/32" .093 13 60/50 $11.75 ea

KELVIN 100 INDUSTRIAL WE STOCK

Stock No.
990087
$ 23" QUALITY
A COMPLETE LINE OF FUSES
AC DC VOLTAGE FAST ACTING -SLO-BLO TYPE -PIGTAIL
DC CURRENT
RESISTANCE
DIODE TEST
BATTERY TEST
3AG FUSE BLOCK
LOW BATTERY Warning Black laminated phenolic. 1/2'' wide
ACCURACY y'. 0.5% 1 7/8'' long. For ye x 1 1/4“
long fuses. Solder lug connections

KELVIN 150 Stock No. YOUR COST

380030 $ .45 ea
FEATURES
Stock No.
990090 $29"
ZONE DIGIT TRUE HEXADECIMAL
DISPLAY WITH BUILT IN LOGIC
THE KELVIN AC/DC VOLTAGE
DC CURRENT
FUSE MOUNTING

L DTrm BLOCK
(MEMORY, DECODER. DRIVERS) RESISTANCE
DIODE 8. BATTERY TEST
FULL ALPHA CHARACTERS KELVIN
LOW BATTERY Warning Dual fuse block 2lie of« long. Black
MTWO INDEPENDENT CLOCKS bakelite base. For 1/4 -o11/4- fuses.
USER ADJUSTABLE FREOLENCY
& DUTY CYCLES Laptop ACCURACY . 05%
CONTINUITY TEST
YOU CAN'T
Mounting centers 5/8» (15.8mm).
Stock No. YOUR COST
TRANSISTOR CHECK
Digital
@BREADBOARD:500 PT PROTO-
TYPE AREA W TWO POWER
DISTRIBUTION BUSSES .ON) vcci
GO WRONG! 380010 $ .62 ea /
Z4 DATA BIT SWITCHES
BMOMENTARY PUSH BUTTON
SWITCH (SPOT)
Trainer Scelio
kl9,1
o.
1 $ 39 95
30 DAY FUSE POST
Wa LED DISPLAYS w IC DRIVERS
@POWER SUPPLY WALL PLUG-IN ONLY AC/DC VOLTAGE MONEY BACK TYPE HKP
Bayonet type. 23/16'1 for 1/e x1tee
TYPE. U.L. LISTED AC/DC CURRENT
GUARANTEE!
ZVOLTAGE REG.•5 VOLTS,
SHORT CIR. OVERLOAD PROTECT
WHOOK.UP WIRES
$99 ,95 RESISTANCE DIODE TEST
LOW BATTERY Warning
ACCURACY v' 05%
CARRYING CASE
fuses. 15 Ampere 250V. Panel hole
size 1/2 (12.7mm).
mounting nut.
Complete with

WCOMPACT CARRYING CASE CONTINUITY TEST/BUZZER Stock No. YOUR COST

@INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR
BEGINNER TO ADVANCED USERS Stock No 840460
TRANSISTOR CHECKER
CAPACITANCE CHECKER
Stack No.
$4.95 ea
990093
380001 $ .90 ea
MADE WITH PRIDE IN THE USA

TIMER -LM555 rf!iri LAPEL MICROPHONE KELVIN BRAND

u
l
HI-SPEED, HI-QUALITY
Stock No. 850306
Stock No. 600021 YOUR COST $2.95 ea PRINTED CIRCUIT ETCHANT
Ready-to-use solution of ferric chloride

20
printed circuit etchant in plastic Container
e ea. (in 100+ QtY) CADMIUM SELENIDE
Stock No. SPECIAL BUY

PHOTO CELL 440017 $ 6.25 per gall "

KELVIN BRAND KELVIN

450 ohms @ 2 t. C minimum dark resistance 225 ohms
Max voltage 170V peak Peaks at 6900 angstroms HI-SPEED DRY
No. 260017 YOUR COST $ 99 ea PRINTED CIRCUIT ETCHANT
Clean, safe, economical. indefinae shelf life
.11\
4 lbs will make 2 gallons of recommended
SULPHIDE 20% etching solution
PHOTO CELL Stock No. YOUR COST NEW PRICE
Transistors (In100+ Qty) 15K ohms @ 2 ft.. C minimum dark resistance 75 ohms 440026 $8.40 ea $7.00/ 41b bag
Max voltage 170V peak Peaks at 5500 angstroms

2N2222 18 ea. No. 260018 YOUR COST $.99 ea KELVIN BRAND COPPER CLAD BOARD
NEMA grade FR-2 1/16* thick. unpunched clad on one side

PN2222 .08 Çea. SUB-MINIATURE

MOMENTARY
Stock No.
440002
Size
4 1/2" x6"
YOUR COST
$1.55 ea

mi]
440003 5" x7" $2.40 ea
Project BUZZER PUSH SWITCH 440015 8 1/2 x12 1/2" $4.90 ea
Silent action rec push button molded housing.
6-9V DC, 80 dB Requires 14' panel hole Overall length including solder lugs is 1
Rated 115 VAC, 1AMP ETCH RESIST INK PENS
Stock No. 680089
Stock No. Color YOUR COST 100.

$1.59 ea $1.39/10+ ea. 990002 Red $.35 ea $ .28 ea

Black felt tip pen for making restst circuits directly on PC boards.
Dries instantly for neat, easy application.
9V Battery Snap & Holder DC MOTOR Can be removed with PC Board Stripping Solution.
1.5 to 6VDC Stock No. Model Description YOUR COST
Snap .15 ea. .1ljea/100+ Stock No. YOUR COST 20. 440115 22-220 Draws 1/32" wide $1.48 ea
Holder .20 ea .1 Oea/100+ 852211 $.50 ea $.45 ea 440116 22-222 Draws 1/64" wide $1.85 ea

Call: 1(800) 645-9212

KELVI7Fairchild Ave. Plainview, NY 11803
Electronics 1(516) 349-7620
FAX: 1(516) 349-7830
FREE CATALOG
Call or Write

WorldRadioHistory
F.I.EKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
74

TUBES •PARTS •SUPPLIES

YOUR COMPLETE SOURCE
TUBES: SUPPLIES:
3000 audio, receiving and indus- Chemicals, test equipment, wire,
trial types in stock, including early batteries, tools, etc.
and foreign types. Discount
prices! LITERATURE:
Extensive offering of literature and
CAPACITORS: books on antique radios, hi-fi,
High voltage electrolytic and mylar communications equipment,
capacitors for tube circuits. tube data, and circuit diagrams.

TRANSFORMERS: PARTS:
Hard-to-find power transformers, Resistors, lamps, tube sockets,
audio transformers, and filter potentiometers, grill cloth, knobs,
chokes for tube equipment. vibrators and more.

"Write or call for our 28 page wholesale catalog"

ANTIQUE ELECTRONIC SUPPLY

6221 S. Maple Avenue, Tempe, AZ 85283, Phone (602) 820-5411, FAX (602) 820-4643

•Advanced Technology

PacComm • Enduring Value

N
HandiPacket PORTABLE PACKET
CONTROLLER

Current Software Today and Tomorrow

Only 1.3" X 2.6" X4.5"

All Metal Case User Serviceable Parts

Open Squelch DCD Large 0.5 AH Battery Builtin

NOW YOU CAN HAVE YOUR PACKET... AND TRAVEL TOO!

$229? 5
* "Open Squelch" DCD circuitry for faster, more reliable per-
NOW
formance * Compact size * Attaches to your belt, handie-
ONLY
talkie or handheld computer * Rugged construction with superb
RF shielding (no birdies in your radio) * Standard battery pack
provides over 12 hours of operation * Advanced Personal Mail For complete info & specifications
Box & KISS mode included * 32 k-bytes of RAM * Complete Call (813) 874-2980 To Order. Cali
with belt clip, cables, battery pack & charger, comprehensive Toll Frio: 1-800-223-3511
manual * 30 day money-back /One year warranty parts & labor Maio, Credit Cards Accepted'

PacComm • 3652 West Cypress Street • Tampa, Florida 33607

Please send HandiPacket 0 More Information 0 FREE Catalog
Name Call

Address Ph*

State Zip Card# Exp Date

MONEY BACK GUARANTEE! Add $4.00 shipping handling per order. FL residents add 6% sales tax
Major Credit Card give number, expiration and signature. FAX: 813-872-8696

WorldRadioHistory
ELEKTOR ELECTRONICS USA JANUARY 1991
 SELECT 5BOOKS
•,
iwwwwwwit
ELECTROSTATIC Ifie siectuceeetace • AUDIO EQUIPMENT
DISCHARGE 1 ELECTRONIC L.,j
PROTECTION —CIRCUITS .
FOR ELECTRONICS
VOLUME ONE '

for only $4 95 o.

(values to $127.70) 1938 560.00

2867P $18.95
Counts as 3

and get a FREE Gift!

FISEROPTIC5 Sound
AND LASER P. Synthesis

3329 $29.95
Counts as 2

Lenk's Video 1
Handbook
.ermo
2981P $16.95 3276 522.95
y

THE GMT 6110k Ill

t ,
ELECTRONICS
PROJECTS
.bisi 0 Link ELEcTRoéac
cmcunrs
10018 $39.95
JOSEF BERNARD WiTH
Counts as 2 2898P 515.95 PRACTICAL
APPUCATIONS
3260 522.95
METERS. -
SCOPES
a a For over 25 years, your most complete 2920 $29.95
1367P $24.95 Counts as 2
source for electronics books.

Membership Benefits •Big Savings. In addition to this introductory ELECIBONIC

offer, you keep saving substantially with members' prices of up to 50% off the aacurrs
lidurne 2
publishers' prices. • Bonus Books. Starting immediately, you will be eligible
3279 $36.95 *Bee zOva
2826P $16.95 Counts as 2 for our Bonus Book Plan, with savings of up to 80% off publishers' prices. •Club -./
News Bulletins. 15 times per year you will receive the Book Club News, describ- ss/
ing all the current selections—mains, alternates, extras—plus bonus offers and s./
nudetel
Cl;
AND SAft ASUM
special sales, with scores of titles to choose from. • Automatic Order. If you
want the Main Selection, do nothing and it will be sent to you automatically. s./ -„„/
If you prefer another selection, or no book at all, simply indicate your choice si/
,
on the reply form provided. You will have at least 10 days to decide. As a
member, you agree to purchase at least 3books within the next 12 months and
How to Read may resign at any time thereafter. • Ironclad No-Risk Guarantee. If not satisfied
Electronic aradit
Diagrams with your books, return them within 10 days without obligation! •Exceptional
•'''' •-- Quality. All books are quality publishers' editions especially selected by our
Editorial Board. (Publishers' Prices Shown) 3138 $60.00
3031P $17.95 2880P $14.95
Counts as 3

Basic
Digital FREE when you join FILTER DESIGN
Electronics
wiiss
15 Easy Electronic Projects
From Delton T. Horn
lo' Projects you can build—some
unique, some old favorites—
from the author's vast treasury
804P $21.95 3370 $25.95 of electronics know-how. 2925P $9.95
3355 526.95
Counts as 2 Counts as 2 Counts as 2

MIIMÉMIN 62 NOME
REMOTE CONTROL

ELECTBONCS BOOK CLUE'

PON PROJECTS
Oriim I

Blue Ridge Summit, PA 17294-0810

Please accept my membership in the Electronics Book Club and send the 5 volumes listed
below, plus my FREE copy of Delton T. Horn's All-Time Favorite Electronic Projects (3105P),
billing me $4.95. If not satisfied, Imay return the books within ten days without obligation and
have my membership cancelled. Iagree to purchase at least 3 books at regular Club prices
during the next 12 months and may resign any time thereafter. A shipping/handling charge
3270 $32.95
3205 $24.95 3241P $16.95 and sales tax will be added to all orders. Counts as 2 2735P $16.95

— ' CONTACT
HOME
DISC PLAYER ELECTRONICS
wareassenc
EIX-IT BOOK

Name

COmPAN;Syï,,' .. Address
1.01, Basic
wan. Electronics City
P.n.«
Course
0...n.e .5.
••4
State Zip Phone

Signature 2790P $14.95 2883P $17.95

3312 $23.95 2613P $17.95
Valid tor new members only. Foreign applicants will receive special ordering instructions. Canada must remit
(Publishers' Prices Shown)
All books are hardcover unless number nU.S currency This order subject to acceptance by the Electronics Book Club. EKE19:1J
C/1991 ELECTRONICS BOOK CLUB
is followed by a "P" for paperback.

WorldRadioHistory
 3000
Top of the Line Universal
HandiCounterTM,
OFF
$375.

THE BENCH
AND
RUNNING
When OPTOELECTRONICS took fre-
quency counters off the bench we
created a whole new dimension -
2600 Frequency Finding.
Super Sensitive RF Our Handi-Counters'" make
Frequency Finder. 2210A Frequency Finding a reality by
$325. Full Range allowing you to pick-up radio
Pocket transmitters at the maximum
Size LED. possible distance.
$239. Monitoring Enthusiast, Security
Specialists, Broadcast and Design
Engineers, Two Way and Amateur
Radio Operators and Service Techni-
cians have all made the move.
-2
2 10 00 a° Shouldn't you?

1300H/A
Low Cost Ultra
Sensitive (HF,
8030 UHF, VHF).
Bench Portable (Fits in an attaché $179.
case) with ALL the HandiCounterTM
Features plus More. $579.

:300 0 °00

OPTOELECTRONICS
Ronge Signal
Low Display Display Strength Universal TCXO
Model High 8Digit LED 10 Digit LCD Bargraph Counter Option

8030 10Hz
2.4GHz
• • ±.1ppm
add $125. Toll Free Order Line:
3000 10Hz
2.4GHz
± .2ppm
add $80.
1-800-327-5912
2600 1MHz ±.2ppm In Florida call (305)771-2050
2.4GHz add S80.

2210A 10Hz ± 5ppm

FAX (305)771-2052
2.4GHz add S75. 5821 NE 14th Avenue •Ft. Lauderdale, FL 33334
1300H/A 1MHz
Visa, MC, COD, Cash, M.O. accepted. Personal
± .5ppm
13GHz add $75. Check allow 3weeks. 5% Shipping, Handling,
Sensitivity: <1 to <10mV typical. NICads & AC Charger/Adapter Included. Carry
(Maximum $10) U.S. 8( Canada. 15% outside
Case, Antennas and Probes extra. One year parts & labor warranty on all products continental U.S.A.

WorldRadioHistory